Chevrolet 2007 Automobile User Manual

2007 Chevrolet Uplander Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 9
Rear Seats ............................................. 13
Safety Belts ............................................ 32
Child Restraints ...................................... 56
Airbag System ........................................ 96
Restraint System Check
....................... 114
Features and Controls .............................. 117
Keys ..................................................... 119
Doors and Locks .................................. 128
Windows ............................................... 143
Theft-Deterrent Systems
....................... 145
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 150
Mirrors .................................................. 165
OnStar® System ................................... 167
Universal Home Remote System
.......... 169
Storage Areas
...................................... 180
Instrument Panel ....................................... 189
Instrument Panel Overview ................... 192
Climate Controls ................................... 217
M
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
..........................................
Driver Information Center (DIC)
............
Audio System(s) ...................................
Driving Your Vehicle .................................
Your Driving, the Road, and Your
Vehicle ..............................................
Towing
.................................................
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
Electrical System ..................................
Capacities and Specifications ................
230
249
284
371
372
410
423
426
428
436
471
476
477
517
526
526
533
1
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 535
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 536
2
Customer Assistance Information .............
Customer Assistance and
Information ........................................
Reporting Safety Defects ......................
Index ..........................................................
555
556
573
577
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
be equipped with all of them. For example,
more than one entertainment system may be
offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
name UPLANDER are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes after that time without further
notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears
in this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15869247 A First Printing
©
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is ever needed when you are on the road.
If the vehicle is sold, leave this manual in
the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If
you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,” “Do
Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9
Manual Seats ................................................ 9
Power Seats ............................................... 10
Heated Seats .............................................. 10
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 11
Head Restraints .......................................... 13
Rear Seats .................................................... 13
Rear Seat Operation ................................... 13
Bucket Seats ............................................... 13
Captain Chairs ............................................ 22
Third Row Seat ........................................... 27
Safety Belts .................................................. 32
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 32
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts ........................................................ 36
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 37
Driver Position ............................................. 38
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 47
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 48
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 48
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 48
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 52
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 55
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 55
Child Restraints ............................................ 56
Older Children ............................................. 56
Infants and Young Children ......................... 59
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 63
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 68
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 70
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 77
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position .................................. 80
Built-In Child Restraint ................................. 85
Airbag System .............................................. 96
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 99
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................ 101
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................. 103
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................. 104
7
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 104
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 106
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 112
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 113
8
Restraint System Check ............................. 114
Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 114
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 115
Front Seats
{CAUTION:
Manual Seats
Use the lever located on
the front of the seat to
adjust the seat
forward or rearward.
Pull up on the lever to
unlock the seat.
Slide the seat to where
you want it and
release the lever.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to
move the seat back and forth with your body.
9
Power Seats
Heated Seats
If the vehicle has power
seats, the controls used
to operate them are
located on the outboard
side of the seats.
Your vehicle may have this feature. If it does, the
heated seat buttons are located on the climate
control panel.
This feature will heat the lower cushions of the
driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
Press this button once
to turn the heated seat
on to the high setting.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the control up
or down.
10
Driver’s Side Button
shown, Passenger’s
Side similar
Both indicator lights next to the heated seat
symbol will be lit to indicate that it is on the high
setting. Press the button a second time to go to the
low setting. One indicator will be lit. Press the
button a third time to turn the heated seat off.
This feature will turn off automatically when
the ignition is turned off.
Reclining Seatbacks
Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The
lever used to operate them is located on the
outboard side of the seats.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
11
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
12
Head Restraints
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and
straps used to adjust, remove, and reinstall
the seats. By using the levers and straps in the
correct order, you can easily remove the seats
from the vehicle. If your vehicle has second row
captain chairs with airbags, the seats cannot
be removed.
When reinstalling the seats, make sure the seats
are in the proper positions.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The height of the head restraints can be adjusted
on the first and second row seats. Pull the
head restraint up or push it down to adjust it.
The head restraints on the third row seat cannot
be adjusted.
If your vehicle has a second row center console, it
can be removed. See Second Row Center
Console on page 183. Do not put a seat in the
center position because the safety belt cannot be
worn properly in this position. See Safety Belts:
They Are for Everyone on page 32.
Bucket Seats
Your vehicle may have bucket seats in the second
row. These seats can be adjusted several
different ways.
13
Fold and Tumble Feature
2. Fold the seatback
flat on the seat.
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while
the second row is folded, or folded and
tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat
to the passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
The second row bucket seats can be folded and
tumbled forward. Use this feature for exiting
and entering third row seats, if the vehicle
has them.
1. Make sure the adjustable head restraints are
in the fully lowered position.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
14
You can do this by either pulling on the nylon
strap, located on the rear right hand side
of the seat, or by lifting the recline lever,
located on the front right hand side of the
seatback.
3. Slide the seat all the way back in this position.
4. Release the rear set
of seat hooks from
the floor pins by
pulling the
nylon strap, located
at the base of
the seat. Use the
strap to guide
the seat forward.
To return the seat to the original position, do the
following:
1. Align the seat so that the rear hooks on the
seat are over the rear floor pins. Push down
firmly on the rear of the seat so that the
rear hooks attach to the rear floor pins.
2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked
to the floor.
3. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear right
hand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,
located on the front right hand side of the
seatback, to raise the seatback to the upright
position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
4. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it
is locked.
One of the bucket seats may be equipped with a
built-in child restraint. See Built-In Child
Restraint on page 85.
15
Adjusting the Bucket Seats Forward
and Rearward
The other lever is
located on the rear of
the seat.
There are two adjustment levers on the second
row bucket seats that enable them to move
forward or rearward.
To adjust the second row bucket seats forward or
rearward, do the following:
One is located below the front of the seat.
16
1. Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward
or rearward.
2. Release the lever when the seat is in the
desired position.
3. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked.
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
The seatback on a bucket seat can either
be folded forward or reclined using the nylon strap
or the recline lever.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
Nylon Strap
Recline Lever
To fold the seatback forward, do the following:
1. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear right
hand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,
located on the front right hand side of the
seatback to release the seatback.
To raise the seatback to the upright position from
a reclined position, do the following:
1. Pull the nylon strap or lift the recline lever
while raising the seatback until it locks to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it
is locked.
17
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull the nylon strap or lift the recline lever.
2. Press back on the seatback until it is in
the desired position
3. Let go of the strap or lever.
3. Lift either one of the adjuster levers and slide
the seat to the most rearward position. See
“Adjusting the Bucket Seats Forward and
Rearward” earlier in this section.
Removing the Bucket Seats
To remove the bucket seats, do the following:
1. Make sure the head restraint is in the
fully lowered position.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
2. Fold the seatback flat on the seat, by either
pulling on the nylon strap, located on the rear
right hand side of the seat, or by lifting the
recline lever, located on the front right
hand side of the seatback.
18
4. Release the rear set of hooks from the floor
pins by pulling the nylon strap, located at the
base of the seat. Use the strap to guide
the seat forward.
Reinstalling the Bucket Seats
{CAUTION:
5. To release the front seat hooks from the floor
pins, squeeze the angled bar, located beneath
the seat toward the straight crossbar.
6. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly forward,
then toward the rear of the vehicle while
pulling it out. This should be done in
one motion.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After installing the seat,
always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Do not install the seat facing the rear of the
vehicle, as it will not lock into place. If more
storage room is needed behind the seat, slide the
seat forward.
Make sure the seat is in the full rear position
before beginning this procedure.
19
To reinstall the bucket seats, do the following:
1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled bar
beneath the seat toward the straight crossbar,
while placing the front hooks of the seat
into the front two floor pins.
2. Make sure the seat
is angled so that the
front seat hooks
clear the floor pins.
If the front hooks
are not attached
correctly, the seat’s
rear hooks will
not attach to the rear
set of floor pins.
If the front hooks are not attaching correctly,
check that the seat is in the full rear position.
20
3. Firmly push the rear seat hooks into the rear
floor pins by pushing down the rear of
the seat.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place
properly can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
place properly when installing it.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
4. Check that the seat is locked by trying to
raise the seat.
5. Pull the nylon strap, located on the rear right
hand side of the seat, or lift the recline lever,
located on the front right hand side of the
seatback, to raise the seatback to the upright
position.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
that it is locked.
21
Captain Chairs
Your vehicle may have second row captain chairs.
If so, they can be adjusted forward or rearward
and the seatbacks can be adjusted.
Adjusting the Captain Chairs Forward
and Rearward
There are two manual adjustment bars on each
seat. One is located under the front of the
seat cushion. The other one is located under the
rear of the seat cushion.
Lift up either bar to slide the seat forward or
rearward. Release the lever. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into place.
22
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
To fold the seatback forward, lift up fully on the
recliner lever. Push the seatback forward until it
is flat.
The armrests can be lowered or raised for easier
entry or exit of the vehicle. If your vehicle has
captain chairs with side impact airbags, they will
have one armrest on the inboard side.
To recline the seatback, lift up on the recliner
lever located on the outboard side of the seat, then
move the seatback to the desired position.
To raise the seatback, lift up on the recliner lever
without applying pressure to the seatback.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
23
Removing a Captain Chair (without a
Side Impact Airbag)
If your vehicle has captain chairs with side impact
airbags, the seats cannot be removed. See
Where Are the Airbags? on page 99 for more
information.
To remove a captain chair, do the following:
2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor
pins and removed from the vehicle.
1. Pull the nylon strap behind the seat to release
the rear hooks from the floor pins.
24
Installing a Captain Chair (without a
Side Impact Airbag)
To install a captain chair, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After installing the seat,
always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Do not put the seats in so they face rearward
because they will not latch that way. For the
second row, if you want more storage room behind
the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it forward.
1. Hook the front latches over the front
floor pins.
Make sure the seatbacks are in the upright
position, the seat belts are on the correct side of
the seats and the seats are in the full rear position
before beginning this procedure.
25
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place
properly can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
place properly when installing it.
3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is
properly attached.
2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the
rear latches onto the rear set of floor pins.
26
Third Row Seat
Your vehicle may have a third row seat. It is a full
bench seat and may come with the convenience
center. See Convenience Center on page 186
for more information. The third row seat can be
removed and replaced, or with the seatback
folded, it will lie flat with the convenience center.
Folding the Seatback(s)
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
To fold down either side of the 50/50 split bench
seat, lift the lever located on the back of the seat
you want to fold, and push the seatback down.
27
Returning the Seatback to an Upright
Position
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Move the second row seat completely forward
by using the manual adjustment bar under
either the front or rear of the seat cushion.
2. Open the liftgate.
28
3. From the rear of the vehicle, locate the
pullstrap attached to the lever on the back of
the seat and pull it to raise the seat.
4. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
that it is locked into place.
Removing the Third Row Seat
1. Remove the convenience center, if equipped.
See Convenience Center on page 186 for
more information.
2. Make sure all items are off the seat.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
3. Put the seatback in its folded position before
removing the seat. See “Folding the
Seatback(s)” earlier in this section.
4. From behind the seat, squeeze the release
handle until the pin indicators are fully out.
This indicates that the rear latches are
released from the floor. For ease of removing
the seat, squeeze the handle with the palm
of your hand up.
5. Lift the seat slightly from the floor to ensure
the latches are clear of the floor pins.
6. Pull the seat rearward and out of the vehicle.
The release handle can be used to carry
the seat.
29
Installing the Third Row Seat
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After installing the seat,
always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Do not put the third row seat in so it faces
rearward because it will not latch that way. The
seat needs to be installed before the convenience
center. See Convenience Center on page 186
for more information.
30
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
For ease of installing the seat, put the seat in the
folded position before beginning this procedure.
1. From the rear of the vehicle, place the
front hooks of the seat onto the front floor pins
in the third row. To do this, the seat will
need to be angled approximately 8-10 inches
(20-25 cm) from the floor so the front
hooks clear the rear floor pins and rear floor
cups. Use the release handle to guide the seat
into place.
If the front hooks are not attached correctly,
the rear latches will not attach to the rear set of
floor pins.
2. Firmly push the rear latches into the rear floor
pins by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place
properly can move around in a collision or
sudden stop. People in the vehicle could
be injured. Be sure to lock the seat into
place properly when installing it.
3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is
locked down. The indicator pins will no
longer stick out when the seat is properly
latched into place.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
4. Return the seatback to its upright position.
See “Returning the Seatback to an Upright
Position” earlier in this section.
31
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
32
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts. See
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 232 and
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light on
page 233.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
33
Put someone on it.
34
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The
rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
35
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
36
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every
airbag system ever offered for sale has
required the use of safety belts. Even if you
are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have
to buckle up to get the most protection. That
is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of
less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 56 or Infants and Young
Children on page 59. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
37
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To
see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
38
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 55.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 47.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
39
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
40
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
41
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
42
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
43
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt
goes over an armrest like this. The belt
would be much too high. In a crash, you
can slide under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied at the abdomen,
not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the
belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
44
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It
should be worn over the shoulder at all
times.
45
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the full
width of the belt to spread impact forces. If
a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can
work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
46
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The
belt should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Incorrect positioning
of the shoulder belt can reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, push
down on the button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can
move the height
adjuster up by pushing
up on the shoulder
belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pushing
the button down to make sure it has locked into
position.
47
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 38.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature which may turn off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, just
let the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
48
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they
can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing
safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 55.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
49
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
50
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
51
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the
shoulder belt:
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is one guide for each second row passenger
position. If your vehicle has a third row, there is
one guide for each outboard position.
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on
the side of the seatback.
52
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the
guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
53
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 48. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Slide the guide into the
storage pocket.
54
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts. They help the safety
belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 115.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To
help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to
fit. The extender has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt. For
more information see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
55
Child Restraints
Q: What is the proper way to wear
safety belts?
Older Children
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The
shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It
should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
56
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
{CAUTION:
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. If the child is sitting in a center
rear seat position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure
that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts
provide. If the child is sitting in a rear outboard
position, see Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides on page 52.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
57
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
58
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
59
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
60
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
61
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of
restraints available for children with special
needs.
62
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
63
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant in
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
64
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
65
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed in
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt
or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
66
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 70
for more information. A child can be endangered
in a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
67
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag
deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
68
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat the unless
passenger airbag status indicator shows off.
Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the airbag is off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, whenever
possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
(Continued)
69
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.
70
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or
a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the
anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In
the United States, some child restraints also have
a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
71
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Second Row
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Third Row
72
Each seating position
with lower anchors has
two labels, near the
crease between the
seatback and the seat
cushion, showing where
the anchors are located.
For the second row seating positions, the top
tether anchors are located on the seatback, near
the base of each seat. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child restraint
will be placed.
Third Row
Second Row
For the center third row position, if your vehicle
has one, the top tether anchor is located on
the seatback, near the center of the third row
seating position. This anchor can accommodate
only one top tether.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or in the third row outboard
positions, if your vehicle has one, if a national
or local law requires that the top tether be
attached, or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be
attached. There is no place to attach the top tether
in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 68
for additional information.
73
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
74
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
75
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
76
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether around the head
restraint.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, raise the
head restraint and route
the tether under the
head restraint and
in between the head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 70.
For vehicles with a third row, there are no top
tether anchors in the outboard seating positions.
Do not secure a child seat in these positions
if a national or local law requires that the top tether
be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
77
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
78
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, and the
position that you are using has a top tether
anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 70.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
79
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer
place to secure a forward-facing child restraint.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 68.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped) when
an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 106 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 235 for more information on
this including important safety information.
If your vehicle has a rear seat, a label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
80
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat the unless
passenger airbag status indicator shows off. Never
put a rear facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat unless the airbag is off. Here
is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
Seats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.
81
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 70.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 70 if
your child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
82
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbags. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 106. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag or airbags are off. If your
child restraint is forward-facing, move the seat
as far back as it will go before securing the
child restraint in this seat. See Manual
Seats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s airbag or
airbags, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to RUN or
START. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 235.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
83
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator
on the instrument panel will be lit and stay lit
when the key is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
84
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle if
one is available and check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Built-In Child Restraint
WARNING! DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can
occur:
• Follow all instruction on the child restraint and
in the vehicle’s owner’s manual.
This child restraint system conforms to all
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
Use only with children who weigh between 22 and
40 lbs (10 and 18 kg) and whose height is
between 33.5 and 40 in (850 and 1 016 mm). Use
only with children whose shoulders are below
the shoulder belt slots for the harness system and
who are capable of sitting upright alone.
The child should also be at least one year old. It is
important to use a rear-facing infant restraint
until the child is at least one year old. A rear-facing
restraint gives the infant’s head, neck and body
the support they would need in a crash. See Older
Children on page 56 or Infants and Young
Children on page 59.
If your vehicle has this feature, the built-in child
restraint is located in the passenger-side position
in the second row.
85
A child whose weight is over 40 lbs (18 kg), whose
height is over 40 in (1 016 mm) or whose
shoulders are above the shoulder belt slots for the
harness system, should be restrained in an
add-on booster seat appropriate for the child’s
size. See Child Restraint Systems on page 63.
Once the booster seat is outgrown, the child
should sit on the vehicle’s regular seat and use
the vehicle’s safety belts.
Securing a Child in the Built-In Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
Using the vehicle’s built-in child restraint
as a booster seat for a larger child could
cause injury to the child in a sudden stop
or crash. A child whose weight is over
40 pounds, whose height is over 40 inches
or whose shoulders are above the
shoulder belt slots for the harness system
should use a restraint system that is
appropriate for their size, either an add-on
booster seat or the vehicle’s safety belt.
See “Child Restraints” or “Older Children”
in the Index.
86
1. Raise the head restraint until the lower edge
of the head restraint is even with the top of
the seatback.
2. Rotate the head restraint rearward until it
touches the top of the seatback. Make
sure there is no gap between the lower edge
of the head restraint and the top of the
seatback.
3. Lower the child restraint cushion.
87
{CAUTION:
Using the vehicle’s regular safety belts on
a child seated on the built-in child
restraint cushion can cause serious injury
to the child in a sudden stop or crash.
Secure the child using the built-in child
restraint’s harness.
You will be using the child restraint’s
harness (A) to secure your child. Do not use
the vehicle’s safety belts.
WARNING: FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS ON THE
USE OF THIS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN
RESULT IN YOUR CHILD STRIKING THE
VEHICLE’S INTERIOR DURING A SUDDEN
STOP OR CRASH.
SNUGLY ADJUST THE BELTS PROVIDED WITH
THIS CHILD RESTRAINT AROUND YOUR
CHILD.
88
4. Before placing the child in the child restraint,
add slack to the shoulder harness. Pull the
black shoulder harness release strap firmly. At
the same time pull both shoulder harness
straps through the slots in the seatback
as shown.
5. Place the child on the child restraint cushion.
6. Select only one side of the harness. Place the
harness over the child’s shoulder.
7. Push the latch plate (A) into the buckle until it
clicks.
Be sure the buckle is free of any foreign
objects that may prevent you from securing
the latch plates. If you can not secure a latch
plate, see your dealer for service before
using the child restraint.
8. Place the other side of the harness over the
child’s shoulder.
89
9. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
10. Pull up on the latch plates to make sure they
are secure.
90
11. Now fasten the left and right halves of the
shoulder harness clip together. The clip can
be easily pulled apart and is designed to
pull apart during a collision.
{CAUTION:
A built-in child restraint harness that is
not properly adjusted can cause injury to
the child in a sudden stop or collision. A
harness that is loose, twisted, worn
improperly or improperly fastened will not
be able to restrain the child’s upper body.
Make sure the harness is adjusted
correctly. Fastening the clip is not a
substitute for adjusting the harness so
that it is snug.
12. Pull the shoulder harness adjustment strap (A)
firmly until the harness is snugly adjusted
around the child. You should not be able to
put more than two fingers between the
harness and the child’s chest. Make sure the
harness and buckle strap are not twisted.
91
13. Adjust the position of the harness on the
child’s shoulder by moving the clip along
the harness until it is level with the child’s
armpits. On each side of the harness,
the shoulder part should be centered on the
child’s shoulder. The harness should be away
from the child’s face and neck, but not
falling from the child’s shoulders.
If you expect that the child will sleep while
riding, you can recline the seatback. See
Bucket Seats on page 13.
92
Removing the Child from the Built-In
Child Restraint
1. Unfasten the shoulder harness clip.
2. Unlatch the harness by pushing the button on
the buckle.
3. Move one side of the harness off the child’s
shoulder.
4. Move the other side of the harness off the
child’s shoulder.
5. Remove the child from the child restraint
cushion.
93
Storing the Built-In Child Restraint
Always properly store the built-in child restraint
before using the vehicle’s lap-shoulder belt.
1. Move both latch plates and both sides of the
shoulder harness clip to the bottom of the
harness straps.
94
2. Fold the child restraint cushion and leg rest
up into the seatback.
3. Press the child restraint cushion firmly into the
seatback.
4. Then press the leg rest firmly into the
seatback, and secure it by pressing the upper
corners against the fastener strips on the
seatback.
5. Rotate the head restraint forward and push it
all the way down.
Just like the other restraint systems in your
vehicle, your built-in child restraint needs to be
periodically checked and may need to have parts
replaced after a crash. See Checking the
Restraint Systems on page 114 and Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 115.
95
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have side impact airbags.
Side impact airbags are available for the driver, the
right front passenger and the second row
captain’s chairs (if equipped).
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on
the side of the seatback closest to the door.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the
risk of injury from the force of an inflating
frontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job and comply with federal
regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
CAUTION:
96
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Side impact airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe crashes
where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags
inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
97
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 56 or Infants and Young Children on
page 59.
98
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 234 for more information.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
99
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the
driver, it is in the side of the driver’s seatback
closest to the door.
100
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the
right front passenger and/or the second row
captain’s chairs (if equipped), it is in the side of
the seatback closest to the door.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Do not let seat
covers block the inflation path of a side
impact airbag.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the
direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle
slows down.
101
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which
help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For more severe frontal impacts, full
deployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle goes
straight into a wall that does not move or deform,
the threshold level for the reduced deployment is
about 12 to 18 mph (19 to 29 km/h), and the
threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to
25 mph (29 to 40.2 km/h). The threshold level can
vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the
object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front
passenger) are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side
impacts.
102
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact
airbags. See Airbag System on page 96.
Side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact
airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or
rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended to
deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation
is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down. For side impact airbags, inflation is
determined by the location and severity of
the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside
the steering wheel and instrument panel. For
seating positions with side impact airbags, there
are also airbag modules in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
103
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But
the frontal airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for vehicles with side
impact airbags.
104
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
frontal airbag, the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, and for
seating positions with side impact airbags, the side
of the seatback closest to the door — may be
hot for a short time. The parts of the airbag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke
and dust coming from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people
from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on
when the airbags inflate and turn on the hazard
warning flashers. You can lock the doors, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers on by using the controls for those
features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger
airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After they inflate, you will need some new
parts for your airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to
help protect you in another crash. A new
system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for
your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 567.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your
airbag system. Improper service can mean
that an airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer for service.
105
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
The passenger airbag status indicator on the
instrument panel will be visible when you turn your
ignition key to RUN or START.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags or the second row
side impact airbags (if equipped) are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s airbag or airbags
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 235.
106
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) under certain conditions,
CAUTION:
(Continued)
107
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger seat unless the
passenger airbag status indicator shows off. Here
is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
CAUTION:
108
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags,
the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbag or airbags are off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
on page 80.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
109
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle if one is available and check with your
dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
airbag or airbags anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag or
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags
are active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
right front passenger’s airbag or airbags,
depending upon the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
110
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s airbag or airbags.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. If
this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 234 for
more on this, including important safety
information.
111
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can
affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your
vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 113 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
112
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 574.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key
is turned off and the battery is
disconnected, an airbag can still inflate
during improper service. You can be
injured if you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be
sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If
you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 556.
113
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
the instrument panel, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag system. If
you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 556.
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly. If
your vehicle has a built-in child restraint, also
periodically make sure the harness straps, latch
plates, buckle, clip, child head restraint and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If
you see anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it repaired. See
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child Restraint
Harness on page 520 for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
114
If your vehicle has the built-in child restraint, torn
or frayed harness straps can rip apart under
impact forces just like torn or frayed safety belts
can. They may not protect a child in a crash.
If a harness strap is torn or frayed, get a
new harness right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, or an airbag covering (if equipped) on a
seatback, the airbag may not work properly.
You may have to replace the airbag module in
the steering wheel, both the airbag module and
the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag, or both the airbag
module and the seatback for seating positions
with a side impact airbag (if equipped.) Do not
open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new safety
belts or built-in child restraint parts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the safety belts or built-in child
restraint harness straps were stretched, as
they would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
115
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, then you may need new
LATCH system parts.
If safety belts or built-in child restraint harness
straps are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have
safety belt, built-in child restraint, LATCH system
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts
and repairs may be necessary even if the safety
belt, built-in child restraint or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
116
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s
safety belt retractor assemblies. Be sure to do so.
Then the new retractor assemblies will be there
to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 234.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................ 119
Remote Keyless Entry System .................. 120
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation ............................................... 121
Doors and Locks ........................................ 128
Door Locks ................................................ 128
Power Door Locks ..................................... 129
Delayed Locking ........................................ 130
Automatic Door Lock ................................. 131
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 131
Lockout Protection ..................................... 131
Dual Sliding Doors .................................... 131
Power Sliding Door (PSD) ......................... 134
Liftgate ...................................................... 141
Windows ...................................................... 143
Power Windows ........................................ 144
Manual Rear Quarter Windows .................. 144
Power Rear Quarter Windows ................... 145
Sun Visors ................................................ 145
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 145
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 146
PASS-Key® III ........................................... 148
PASS-Key® III Operation ........................... 148
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 150
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 150
Ignition Positions ....................................... 151
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 152
Starting the Engine .................................... 152
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 154
Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 155
Parking Brake ........................................... 159
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 160
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 161
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 162
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 163
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 164
117
Section 2
Features and Controls
Mirrors ......................................................... 165
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 165
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 165
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 166
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 166
OnStar® System .......................................... 167
Universal Home Remote System ................ 169
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED) ....................... 169
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED) ..................... 170
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 171
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 176
118
Storage Areas ............................................. 180
Glove Box ................................................. 180
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 180
Overhead Console (Without Rail) ............... 181
Overhead Console (With Rail) ................... 181
Floor Console Storage Area ...................... 183
Folding Tray .............................................. 183
Second Row Center Console .................... 183
Luggage Carrier ........................................ 184
Convenience Net
(With Rear Convenience Center) ............ 185
Convenience Net
(Without Rear Convenience Center) ....... 186
Convenience Center .................................. 186
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move. The children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. Do
not leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
This vehicle has one key for the ignition and the
driver’s door lock.
119
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft
system. The key has a transponder in the key
head that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s
steering column. If a replacement key or
any additional key is needed, you must purchase
this key from your dealer. The key will have
PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that
came with the original keys. Give this tag to your
dealer if you need a new key made.
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key®
III on page 148 for more information on
programming your new key.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, see
Roadside Assistance Program on page 562 for
more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If the vehicle has the keyless entry system, it
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
120
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is normal for any remote keyless entry system.
If the transmitter does not work or if you have to
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter
to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 121.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
The remote keyless
entry transmitter shown
here is for a vehicle
equipped with the
remote vehicle start
feature and dual power
sliding doors.
The remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
your vehicle will only contain the buttons specific
to your vehicle’s factory installed remote
system features.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has
this feature, you can start the engine from outside
the vehicle. See “Remote Vehicle Start” at the
end of this section for more detailed information.
You can lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors and
the liftgate using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
121
Q (Lock): To lock all doors and the liftgate,
press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See Power Door Locks on page 129
for more details on the power door lock features.
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent
system, the remote keyless entry transmitter’s lock
button may arm the system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 146 for more details.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, the turn signal lamps may
flash to let you know the command has been
received. If you press the lock button again, within
five seconds, the horn will sound and the turn
signal lamps may flash to let you know the vehicle
is already locked. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK”
under DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel
Only) on page 275 for additional information.
" (Unlock): When you press unlock on the
remote keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’s
door will unlock. If you press unlock again
within five seconds, all the doors and the liftgate
will unlock. If you would like all the doors to unlock
the first time you press unlock, see “FOB
UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 275.
122
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent
system, the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter will disarm the system. See
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 146 for more
details.
When you use your remote keyless entry
transmitter to unlock your vehicle the turn signal
lamps will flash to let you know the command was
received.
L (Remote Alarm): When you press the horn
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will
sound. This will allow you to attract attention, if
needed.
Press this button again to stop the alarm from
sounding.
Remote Power Sliding Door Operation
+ (Power Sliding Door): If your vehicle
has one power sliding door, the remote keyless
entry transmitter will have a button with a van
symbol on it. Press and hold this button to open or
close the power sliding door. See Power Sliding
Door (PSD) on page 134.
*+ (Dual Power Sliding Doors): If your
vehicle has dual power sliding doors, your remote
keyless entry transmitter will have two buttons
that have a van symbol on them. The van symbol
on the left is for the driver’s side sliding door
and the van symbol on the right is for the
passenger’s side sliding door. Press and hold the
passenger’s or driver’s side button, with the
van symbol on it, to open or close the selected
power sliding door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)
on page 134.
You can operate the power sliding door(s) with the
remote keyless entry transmitter even if the
power sliding door override switch(es), on the
overhead console, are active or inactive.
See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 134 for
additional information.
If the sliding door is closed and the power sliding
door button on the transmitter is pressed and
held, the vehicle’s doors will be unlocked and then
the power sliding door will open. If the power
sliding door has been locked using the manual
door lock lever, you will need to unlock the power
sliding door before it can be opened with the
remote keyless entry transmitter sliding door
button.
If your vehicle’s fuel filler door is opened, the
driver’s side power sliding door will not open
completely. Do not try to force the door. Once the
fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding
door can be opened normally.
123
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased through your
dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer.
When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters must also be matched. Once your
dealer has coded the new transmitter, the
lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each
vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
matched to it.
See your dealer to match transmitters to another
vehicle.
124
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote
keyless entry transmitter should last about
three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter
will not work at the normal range in any location. If
you have to get close to your vehicle before the
transmitter works, it is probably time to change the
battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into the
slot on the side of the transmitter and twist it
to separate the halves.
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows you to start the engine from
outside the vehicle. It may also turn the rear
window defogger if the outside temperature is
below 45°F (7°C).
Laws in some local communities may restrict the
use of remote starters. For example, some
laws may require a person using remote start to
have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check
local regulations for any requirements on remote
starting of vehicles.
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter.
Do not use the metal flanges to pop out the
battery.
3. Replace the battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the
halves are snapped together tightly so water
will not get in.
5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
for seven seconds to synchronize the
transmitter.
6. Check the transmitter operation.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has
the remote vehicle start feature, the remote
keyless entry transmitter will have a button with
this symbol on it.
An increased range of operation is provided with
the remote keyless entry transmitter that has
the remote vehicle start button.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the
remote start feature. The vehicle may run out of
fuel. The vehicle may also run out of fuel if
the vehicle is running for a long period of time
when parked on an incline facing downward with a
low fuel condition.
125
To start the engine using the remote start feature,
do the following:
1. Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter,
equipped with the remote vehicle start
button, at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock
button, then immediately press and hold
the remote vehicle start button until the
vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash, or for at
least two seconds, if the vehicle’s lights are
not visible. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.
The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles with the
key is two.
3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on while the
engine is running.
If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,
and the engine is running, insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn it to the RUN position
to drive the vehicle.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into
the ignition switch and turned to RUN.
126
If the remote start procedure is used again before
the first 10 minute time frame has ended, the
first 10 minutes will immediately expire and
the second 10 minute time frame will start.
After two remote starts have been provided, the
vehicle’s ignition switch must be turned to
RUN and then back to LOCK using the key before
the remote start procedure can be used again.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote
start, do any of the following:
• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at
the vehicle and press the remote start
button until the parking lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to RUN and then back
to LOCK.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:
• The remote start system is disabled. See
“REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 275.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are not
closed.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• There is an emission control system
malfunction.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided. The maximum number of remote
starts or remote start attempts between ignition
cycles with the key is two.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it may have the remote start
ready feature. This feature allows your dealer to
add the manufacturer’s remote vehicle start
feature.
If the keyless entry transmitter has a plus (+)
symbol on the back cover, your vehicle has the
remote start ready feature. You can lock or
unlock your vehicle from approximately 197 feet
(60 m) away.
See your dealer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
127
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out. A
child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
To unlock the driver’s door from the outside with
the key, insert the key and turn it toward the
front of the vehicle. To lock the driver’s door from
the outside with your key, insert the key and
turn it toward the rear of the vehicle.
128
If your vehicle has power door locks, you may be
able to unlock all of the doors and the liftgate
when you insert the key, turn it toward the front of
the vehicle, and hold it there for one second.
You may be able to lock all of the doors when you
insert the key and turn it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
Your vehicle has power door locks.
The switches are
located on the driver’s
and front passenger’s
door. Press the top
of the switch to unlock
the doors and liftgate.
With the content theft-deterrent system, the power
door lock switch will not unlock the doors until
the system is disarmed. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 146 for more details.
From the inside, use the manual or power
door locks.
To unlock either front door from the inside, pull
back on the manual lever. To lock either front door
from the inside, push the manual lever forward.
Press the bottom of the switch to lock the doors
and liftgate. With the content theft-deterrent
system, the power door lock switch may cause the
system to arm. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 146 for more details.
129
Delayed Locking
This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be
delayed until all doors have been closed for
approximately five seconds.
To activate the delayed locking feature, do one of
the following:
• Press the driver’s door power lock switch one
time while the driver’s door is open.
• Press the passenger’s door power lock switch
one time while the passenger’s door is open.
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter one time while any door
is open.
Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed
locking is active.
The doors may be locked immediately by repeating
any of the above actions more than one time.
130
If a door remains open, without any other door
being opened or closed, the vehicle will lock after
approximately 45 seconds.
If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock
the doors.
To turn the delayed locking feature off or on, see
DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 275.
Sliding Door Delayed Locking
If either sliding door is open when you use the
power door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding
door that is open will not lock. Normally the
delayed locking feature will be used to lock the
sliding door after it has been closed.
The sliding door delayed locking feature will lock
your sliding door(s) in situations where the delayed
locking feature does not apply or was overridden
or programmed to be off. See “Delayed Locking”
earlier in this section. Shortly after the last
sliding door is closed, all the doors will lock.
Automatic Door Lock
Lockout Protection
All of the doors will lock automatically when you
move the shift lever out of PARK (P). This feature
cannot be disabled.
The lockout protection feature makes it more
difficult to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s
door is open while the key is in the ignition, the door
cannot be locked with the power door lock switch.
If someone needs to get out of the vehicle while it
is not in PARK (P), shift into PARK (P), or,
have that person use the manual lever or the
power door lock switch. When the door is closed
again, it will lock when the vehicle exceeds
5 mph (8 km/h).
With automatic door locks, you can lock or unlock
the doors at any time, either manually or by
using the power door lock switches.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
Your vehicle was programmed so that all doors
will unlock automatically when the shift lever
is moved into PARK (P).
To change the way the automatic door unlocking
operates, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only) on page 275.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in the
ignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, the key
could still be locked inside the vehicle. Always
remember to take the key with you.
Dual Sliding Doors
To open either sliding door from outside the
vehicle, pull the handle out and then pull the door
toward the rear. If you slide the door all the
way back, the door will rest in a detent position.
To move the door forward, you must first pull
the door past the open detent position.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open
only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever
happens, do not try to force the sliding door. Just
close the driver’s side sliding door. Then when
the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side sliding
door can be opened normally.
131
Sliding Door Lock
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is facing downward on a
steep grade (15 percent or more), the door
may not stay open and could slam shut,
possibly injuring someone. To make sure
the door does not slam shut be sure to
hold it open until everyone is clear of the
door, and only then allow it to slowly
close.
132
Sliding Door Security Lock
Lock either sliding door from inside the vehicle by
moving the manual lever down. Unlock it by
moving the lever up.
Your vehicle is equipped with sliding door security
locks that helps prevent young children or other
passengers from opening the sliding door(s) using
the inside door handle. To use one of these
locks, do the following:
1. Open the sliding door.
2. On the inside of the
sliding door(s), on
the front edge of the
door will be a lock.
Push the lever up to
engage the lock.
With the power door locks, the sliding door lock
has a delay feature. See Delayed Locking on
page 130 and DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only) on page 275.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.
133
If your vehicle has power sliding door(s), you can
prevent power opening of the sliding door from
the passenger power sliding door (psd) activation
switch by pressing the psd second row passenger
override (deactivation) switch located on the
overhead console. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)
on page 134.
If you want to open the sliding door while the
security lock is on, unlock and open the door from
the outside.
You should let adults and older children know how
the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock.
If you do not, adults or older children who ride in the
rear will not be able to open the sliding door from
the inside while the security lock feature is in use.
Canceling the Sliding Door
Security Lock
1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door
from the outside.
2. Push the security lock lever all the way down.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.
The sliding door lock will now work normally.
134
Power Sliding Door (PSD)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can open and
close the power sliding door(s) using the
switches inside your vehicle. You can also operate
the sliding door(s) with your remote keyless
entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry
System on page 120.
{CAUTION:
Leaving your children or pets unattended
in your vehicle can be dangerous. They
could operate the power sliding door. A
child or others could be injured. Do not
leave children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Power Sliding Door (PSD) Switches
If your vehicle has dual
power sliding doors, you
have these switches.
Your vehicle will have one of the following
switch(es) located on the overhead console
switchbank.
If your vehicle has a
single power sliding
door (PSD), you
have this switch.
Driver’s Side and
Passenger’s Side PSD
Activation/Override
(Deactivation) Switches
PSD Activation/Override
(Deactivation) Switch
135
Your vehicle also has
passenger power sliding
door activation
switch(es).
Passenger PSD
Activation Switch
If you have a single PSD, this switch is located in
front of the passenger side sliding door. If your
vehicle has dual PSDs, the switches are located in
front of both sliding doors.
136
Power Sliding Door Operation
The power sliding door(s) will only open if the
transaxle is in PARK (P). The transaxle does not
have to be in PARK (P) to close the door(s).
There are several ways to open and close the
power sliding door(s).
• If your vehicle has a single power sliding door,
press the top of the overhead console PSD
activation/override (deactivation) switch.
• If your vehicle has dual power sliding doors,
press the top of the driver’s side and/or
passenger’s side overhead console PSD
activation/override (deactivation) switch.
• Press the passenger PSD activation switch.
This switch will also stop a moving door
immediately.
• Press the power sliding door button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
• To manually open the power sliding door(s)
while the switch(es) are in the activation
position, pull and release the inside or outside
door handle to release the door latch. The
door will fully open.
• To manually close the power sliding door(s)
while the switches are in the activation
position, pull the inside or outside door handle
or the edge of the door. Move the door
about 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed
position and release it. The door will close
completely and latch.
If a power sliding door is locked, it cannot be
unlocked and opened using the overhead console
PSD switch(es) or the passenger PSD activation
switch(es). The power sliding door must either
be manually unlocked or unlocked using the power
door unlock switch located on the driver’s or
front passenger’s armrest, and then opened using
the overhead or passenger PSD activation
switch(es).
The remote keyless entry transmitter can also be
used to open the power sliding door(s). If the
vehicle is locked, press the power sliding
door button(s) and all doors will unlock and the
sliding door(s) will open. See Remote Keyless
Entry System Operation on page 121.
If the power sliding door has been manually
locked, you must unlock the PSD before it can be
opened.
Notice: If you leave the power sliding door on
when you go through an automatic car
wash, the door may accidentally open. Be sure
the power sliding door is turned off when
going through a car wash.
137
If the power sliding door(s) is open or in the
process of closing when you shift out of PARK (P),
a chime will sound. This is a warning that the
sliding door(s) is not completely closed. Also, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicate if
the door is open. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 256. Stop the vehicle and
close the door.
{CAUTION:
If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P)
and accelerate before the power sliding
door latches closed, the door may reverse
to the open position. A child or others
could fall out of the vehicle and be
injured. Always make sure the power
sliding door is closed and latched before
you drive away.
If an object obstructs the power sliding door(s)
while it is closing, the door will automatically
reverse to the open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance. Resistance must be as strong
as the force of the closing door, or stronger.
The force of the closing door increases
significantly as the door approaches the latched
position.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open
only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever
happens, do not try to force the sliding door. When
the fuel filler door is closed, the driver’s side
sliding door can be opened normally.
138
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You or others could be injured if caught in
the path of the sliding door. Make sure the
door path is clear before closing the door.
If your vehicle is facing downward on a
steep grade (15 percent or more), the door
may not stay open and could slam shut,
possibly injuring someone. To make sure
the door does not slam shut, turn on the
power sliding door feature. Then if the
door closes, it will close under the control
of the power door system.
139
Power Sliding Door Second Row
Passenger Override (Deactivation)
To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding
door(s) by using the passenger PSD activation
switch, press the override (deactivation) part of the
overhead console switch. The door can still be
manually opened from the inside or outside
with the override (deactivation) on.
To open a power sliding door(s) manually when
the overhead console switch is in override
(deactivation) position, pull the inside or outside
door handle and slide the door all the way back.
To close the door(s) manually when the override
switch(es) is in the override (deactivation) position,
pull the inside or outside door handle and slide
the door all the way forward to the latched position.
To stop the door(s) immediately while the
door(s) is opening or closing, press the PSD
override (deactivation) part of the switch.
Pressing the PSD button(s) on the remote keyless
entry will open and close the door unless the
door has been manually locked using the
mechanical slider.
140
Resetting the Power Sliding Door
The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or
not at all because of the following conditions:
• A low voltage or dead battery
• A disconnected battery
• If the instrument panel PSD/fuse 21,
LHPSD/fuse 24 or RHPSD/fuse 25 are
removed or blown.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 527 for
more information.
If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding
door may need to be reset. If your vehicle has
the dual power sliding doors, both doors will have
to be reset. To reset a door, do the following:
1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is
unlocked and securely closed.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
3. If the power sliding door overhead console
switch is in the override (deactivation)
position, return to the activation position.
4. Open the sliding door using the remote
keyless entry transmitter, overhead console
switch, or passenger switch. Allow the door to
travel fully open.
If the door does not travel to the fully open
position, press the overhead console switch to the
override (deactivation) position and slide the
door fully open and closed. Check for foreign
objects in the tracks. Repeat the procedure starting
with Step 1. If the door resists travel to the fully
open position, see your dealer for service.
Liftgate
To unlock or lock the liftgate from the outside, use
the remote keyless entry transmitter. For more
information, see Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 121.
You can also use the power door lock switch to
lock and unlock the liftgate.
Open the liftgate using the handle located above
the license plate. Once slightly opened, the
liftgate will rise by itself. Lamps in the rear of the
vehicle will come on, illuminating the rear
cargo area.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without
checking for overhead obstructions such as a
garage door, you could break the liftgate
glass. Always check to make sure the area
above the liftgate is clear before opening it.
141
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you
must drive with the liftgate open or if
electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that will
force outside air into your vehicle. See
Climate Control System on page 217
or Dual Climate Control System on
page 220.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the
way. See Engine Exhaust on page 163.
142
To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then
firmly shut the liftgate. Do not drive with the
liftgate open, even slightly.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
143
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The switches on the
driver’s door armrest
control the front
windows when the
ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY or when
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 152.
The driver’s power window switch has two down
positions. The first position lowers the window
normally.
To activate the express-down feature, push the
AUTO switch all the way down to the second
position, then release it. The window will lower
completely. To stop the window from lowering all
the way, pull up on the front of the switch.
Manual Rear Quarter Windows
Your vehicle may have manual rear quarter
windows.
To open, pull the latch
forward to release it,
then swing the window
outward. Press the
center of the latch to
secure the window
in the open position.
To raise the window, pull up the front of the
switch.
To close, pull the center of the latch forward and
then close the latch. Press the center of the
latch to secure the window in the closed position.
144
Power Rear Quarter Windows
Sun Visors
Your vehicle may have power rear quarter
windows.
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount
and swing them to the side. The sun visors can
also slide along the rod to cover different areas of
the front window.
This switch, located in
the overhead console
switchbank, is used
for opening and closing
the power rear
quarter windows.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have a visor vanity mirror. Pull
down the sun visor to access the vanity mirror.
Lighted Vanity Mirror
Press the top of the switch to open the windows;
both windows will open. The windows will
continue to open as long as the switch is pressed,
until they are fully opened.
Press the bottom of the switch to close both
windows. The windows can be closed fully or
partially, depending on how long the switch
is pressed.
The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY, or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active,
to use the power rear quarter windows. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 152.
Your vehicle may have a lighted vanity mirror. Pull
down the sun visor and flip up the cover to
expose the vanity mirror. The lamps will come on
when you flip up the cover.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
145
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm
system.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries
to enter the vehicle without using the remote
keyless entry transmitter or a key, or turns
the ignition to RUN. The horn will sound and the
turn signal lamps will flash for up to two minutes.
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Your alarm system will arm when the key is
removed from the ignition and you use the driver’s
power door lock switch, with the driver’s door
open or the passenger’s door power door
lock switch with the passenger’s door open to lock
the vehicle. If you would like to turn on power
door lock switch arming, see DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 275.
A light located on top of your instrument panel,
near the center of the vehicle next to the
windshield, will flash slowly to let you know that
the system has been armed.
While armed, the doors will not unlock with the
power door lock switch.
146
When the security light flashes quickly the system
is arming. After all doors and the liftgate are
closed and locked, the security light will begin
flashing at a very slow rate to let you know
the system is armed.
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm if the key is not in the
ignition and you use your remote keyless entry
transmitter to lock the doors. The security light will
flash to let you know the system is arming. If
you press the transmitter’s lock button twice within
five seconds, the horn will sound. After all doors
and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security
light will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let
you know the system is armed.
Arming with Your Key
Your alarm system will arm when you use your
key to lock the driver’s door. The security light will
flash to let you know the system is arming.
After all doors and the liftgate are closed and
locked, the security light will begin flashing at a
very slow rate to let you know the system is
armed. If you would like your key not to arm the
system, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel
Only) on page 275.
Arming Confirmation
If remote unlock confirmation is on, the turn signal
lamps will flash briefly to let you know when
your alarm system has disarmed. If you would not
like the turn signal lamps to flash, see DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 275.
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the
doors. The security light will stop flashing to let you
know the system is no longer armed.
Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
key to unlock the driver’s door. The security
light will stop flashing to let you know the system
is no longer armed. If you would like your key
not to disarm the alarm system, see DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 275.
147
PASS-Key® III
Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
148
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder
in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key® III
(Personalized
Automotive Security
System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key® III
is a passive theft
deterrent system.
This means you do not have to do anything different
to arm or disarm the system. It works when you
insert or remove the key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the
vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will
not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the
engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to
start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the
high number of electrical key codes.
must see your dealer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III to have keys made
and programmed to the system.
If the engine does not start and the security
message comes on, the key may have a damaged
transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
To program the new key, do the following:
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to check the
instrument panel PASS KEY fuse. If the engine
still does not start with the other key, your vehicle
needs service. If your vehicle does start, the
first key may be faulty. See your dealer or
a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key® III to
have a new key made. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 527.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be
programmed for the vehicle. This procedure is for
learning additional keys only. If all the currently
programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to get a new key blank that is
cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the
system.
1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed
key into the ignition lock cylinder and start the
engine. If the engine will not start, see your
dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
RUN within 10 seconds of removing the
previous key.
5. The security message will turn off once the
key has been programmed. It may not be
apparent that the security message went on
due to how quickly the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
149
If you are ever driving and the security message
comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart
your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III
system, however, is not working properly and must
be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not
protected by the PASS-Key® III system at
this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
150
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with new linings can
mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 412 for the
trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle
and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
The key can be turned to one of four positions
while in the ignition switch.
key only with your hand. Make sure the key is
all the way in. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which
you can operate the electrical accessories, such as
the radio.
C (RUN): This is the position to which the switch
returns after the engine is started and the
ignition key is released. This is the position for
driving. Even while the engine is not running, RUN
can be used to operate your electrical accessories
and to display some instrument panel warning
lights.
A (LOCK): This is the only position from which
you can remove the key. This position locks
your ignition and transaxle.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or
break the key. Use the correct key and turn the
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACCESSORY or RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine. When
the engine starts, release the ignition key. The
switch will return to RUN for driving.
151
Key In the Ignition
Starting the Engine
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your
vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the
driver’s door. Always remember to remove
your key from the ignition and take it with you.
This will lock your ignition and transaxle.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position — that is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With RAP, your power windows and the audio
system will continue to work for up to 10 minutes
after the engine is turned off or until either
door is opened. If a door is opened, the power
windows and audio system will shut off.
152
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift
into PARK (P) only when your vehicle is
stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
your ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will
go down as your engine warms up. Do
not race the engine immediately after starting
it. Operate the engine and transaxle gently
until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects the electrical
system. If the ignition key is turned to the
START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking until the vehicle starts or
until it exceeds the maximum cranking
time allowed, approximately 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
starter-motor gear damage, this system
also prevents cranking if the engine is already
running. The engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY or LOCK position.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will cause your
battery to be drained much sooner. And the
excessive heat can damage your starter motor.
Wait about 15 seconds between each try to
help avoid draining your battery or damaging
your starter.
2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds,
push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter
of the way down while you turn the key to
START. Do this until the engine starts.
As soon as it does, let go of the key.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but
then stops, it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for
a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still will not start, or starts briefly but then
stops again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on
the temperature. When the engine starts,
release the key and the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your dealer. If you do not, your engine might
not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
153
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get
easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater
should be plugged in a minimum of four hours
prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not
required. Your vehicle may also have an internal
thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This
will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C)
as noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The electrical cord is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
154
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
ease pressure on the shift lever and psh the shift
lever all the way info PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever into another gear. See
Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 161.
{CAUTION:
Maximum engine speed is limited when you are in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for your
shift lever.
PARK (P): This gear position locks your front
wheels. It is the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle cannot move
easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You
must fully apply your regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is
in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 160. If you
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 412.
155
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 403.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
156
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
high speed may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at
high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If
you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
The vehicle will shift down to the next gear
and have more power.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see Skidding
under Loss of Control on page 387
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up
rather slowly or not shift gears when you go
faster, and you continue to drive your vehicle
that way, you could damage the transaxle.
Have your vehicle serviced right away. You can
drive in SECOND (2) when you are driving
less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for
higher speeds until then.
Warm-Up Shift
Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle
designed to warm up the engine faster when
the outside temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder.
You may notice that the transaxle will shift at
a higher vehicle speed until the engine is warmed
up. This is a normal condition designed to
provide heat to the passenger compartment and
defrost the windows more quickly. See Climate
Control System on page 217 and Dual Climate
Control System on page 220 for more information.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. It reduces vehicle speed more than
DRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You might
choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) when
driving on hilly, winding roads, when towing
a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
157
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help
control your speed as you go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,
shifting into SECOND (2) at speeds above
65 mph (105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive in
THIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up
rather slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears
as you go faster, something may be wrong with
a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very
far that way, your vehicle can be damaged. So,
if this happens, have your vehicle serviced
right away. Until then, you can use SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph
(55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher speeds.
158
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than SECOND (2) without using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the
transaxle will not shift into first gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. If
you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parking
brake to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located under the
instrument panel on the
driver’s side of the
vehicle.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot and push down on
the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down with your right foot while
you push down on the parking brake pedal with
your left foot. When you lift your left foot from the
parking brake pedal, it will pop up to the
released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any
hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 412.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 238.
159
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 412.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling
the shift lever toward you and moving it up as
far as it will go.
160
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and the parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you move the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If
you can, it means that the shift lever was not
fully locked into PARK (P).
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
out of PARK (P) before you release the parking
brake.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the
parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it
difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This
is called torque lock. To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)
properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To
find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 160.
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in
PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK
position. In addition, you must fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 155.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P).
161
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
162
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION:
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
163
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 163.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 399.
164
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 160.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 412.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
While sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind
your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move
it up or down and side to side. The day/night
adjustment can lessen glare from the headlamps
behind your vehicle. Pull the tab forward for
daytime use; push it back for night use.
Outside Power Mirrors
Push the top control to the left or right to choose
either the driver’s or passenger’s outside
rearview mirror. Leave the control in the center
position to prevent moving the mirrors once
they are adjusted.
Use the arrows on the bottom control to adjust the
position of each mirror. Adjust each mirror so
that you can see the side of your vehicle and the
area behind it, while sitting in a comfortable
driving position.
Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or
rearward to prevent damage when going through
car washes or confined spaces.
The controls, located on
the driver’s door,
operate both outside
rearview mirrors.
165
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
166
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
seen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things
appear farther away than they really are.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If the vehicle has outside heated rearview mirrors,
they are activated when the rear window
defogger is turned on. See “Rear Window
Defogger” in Climate Control System on page 217
or Dual Climate Control System on page 220.
OnStar® System
A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the
Terms and Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription
Service Agreement are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber Information packet located in
your vehicle. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, contact
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or
press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock your
keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe
& Sound Plan is included for one year from the
date of purchase. You can extend this plan beyond
the first year, or upgrade to the Directions &
Connections® Plan to meet your needs. For more
information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
167
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe & Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
168
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows OnStar®
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands at the touch of a button. Hands-Free
Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and may
be used with Pre-Paid Minute Packages or
linked to a cell phone through OnStar® Shared
Minutes Plan. To find out more, refer to the
OnStar® Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,
visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or
speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the
OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a
feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling that uses
your minutes to access weather, local traffic
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone
button and giving a few simple voice commands,
you can browse through the various topics.
Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
$: Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact with
OnStar®.
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 367
for more information.
When calling into voice mail systems or to dial
directory numbers, press this button once, wait for
the response, say the number(s) to be dialed,
wait for the number(s) to be repeated and then say
“dial.” See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Universal Home Remote
System
Universal Home Remote System
(With Three Round LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is KOBGTE05A.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
3521A-GTE05A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
169
Universal Home Remote System
(With One Triangular LED)
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization
Certificate number is CB2SAHL3.
170
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is
2791021849A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Do not use the this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting
Diode (LED) above the Universal Home Remote
System buttons, follow the instructions below. If
there is one triangular LED above the Universal
Home Remote System buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with one triangular LED).
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for
future programming. You only need the original
remote control transmitter for fixed code
programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing your Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home lighting.
171
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or security device you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
Fixed Code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced prior to 1996. Fixed code
uses the same coded signal every time, which
is manually programmed by setting DIP switches
for a unique personal code.
Follow these steps to program up to three
channels:
1. Remove the battery cover of the hand-held
transmitter.
If you do not know if your garage door opener is a
fixed code or rolling code device, open your
garage door opener’s remote control battery cover.
Your garage door opener is a fixed code device
if there is a panel of switches. If not, your
garage door opener is a rolling code device.
172
Example of Switch Settings
2. Write down the eight to 12 coding switch
settings from left to right. When the switch
is in the up position, write “on,” and when a
switch is in the down position, write “off”.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “middle”.
3. Enter these positions into the Universal Home
Remote System as follows.
Press and release all three buttons at the same
time to put the device into programming mode.
Example
4. The indicator light will blink slowly. In order
from left to right, and within two and one-half
minutes, enter each switch setting into the
Universal Home Remote System. Push
one button for each switch as follows:
• Left button = “on” switch position.
• Right button = “off” switch position.
• Middle button = “middle” switch position.
5. After entering the switch settings, press and
release all three buttons at the same time.
The indicator lights will turn on.
173
6. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light above
the selected button should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 8, choosing
a different function button in Step 7 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
174
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
Rolling code garage door openers are used for
garage doors produced after 1996 and are
code protected. Rolling code means the coded
signal is changed every time your remote control
garage door opener is used.
Programming a rolling code garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so read the
entire procedure before you begin. If you do not
follow these actions, the device will time out
and you will have to repeat the procedure.
Follow these steps to program up to three
channels:
1. Press the two outside buttons at the same
time for one to two seconds, and immediately
release them.
3. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light, above
the selected button, should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
20 seconds.
4. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
5. Press and release the button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
2. Go to the garage. Locate the garage door
motor head and press and release the
“learn” button.
After pressing the “learn” button, you have 10
to 30 seconds to complete Step 4 depending
on your garage control unit. If you cannot
locate the “learn” button, refer to the owners
guide for your garage door opener.
To program another device such as an additional
garage door opener, a security device, or
home lighting, repeat Steps 1 through 6, choosing
a different function button in Step 4 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
175
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell the vehicle or terminate your lease.
To erase either rolling code or fixed code on the
Universal Home Remote device, do the following:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at
the same time for approximately 20 seconds,
until the indicator lights, located directly
above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
button will be erased.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 560.
176
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there is one triangular Light
Emitting Diode (LED) above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions
below. If your vehicle has three round LED above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (with three round LED).
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the
stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage
door opener model manufactured before April 1,
1982. If you have a newer garage door opener
with rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps
6 through 8 to complete the programming of
your Universal Home Remote Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
the programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security purposes. See
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in
this section or, for assistance, see Customer
Assistance Offices on page 560.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate operator you are
programming. When programming a garage door,
it is advised to park outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and
more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three
channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside
Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat
this step to program a second and/or
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
two Universal Home Remote buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button
and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
177
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do
not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of
the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to
complete the programming of a rolling-code
device, most commonly, a garage door opener.
178
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the programmed Universal Home Remote
button for two seconds, then release. Repeat
the press/hold/release sequence a second
time, and depending on the brand of the
garage door opener or other rolling code
device, repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
The Universal Home Remote should now
activate the rolling-code device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal Home Remote
buttons.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
button until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to complete.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Remote button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal
Home Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
179
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step
2 under “Programming Universal Home
Remote” shown earlier in this section.
For additional information on Universal Home
Remote, see Customer Assistance Offices
on page 560.
Storage Areas
Your vehicle’s large carrying capacity can store
many items. If the vehicle has an extended
wheelbase, it can carry even larger items. The
floor pins that are used to attach the seats, can be
used to secure larger loads.
180
Glove Box
If the glove box has a lock, put your key into the
lock and turn the key counterclockwise. To
open the glove box, pull the latch release.
The glove box door has a detent to prevent the
door from lowering too far. Open the glove
box until the door is partway open, then pull the
door down if you need it fully opened.
To close the glove box, the door must be pushed
up past the detent. To lock the glove box, put
your key into the lock and turn the key clockwise.
Cupholder(s)
There are cupholders located below the center
instrument panel switchbank. The cupholders have
a rubber liner that can be removed, so that
larger cups can fit into the cupholders. You can
also remove the liner to clean it.
To use the cupholders, pull the tray out. Push the
tray back when not in use.
Your vehicle may be equipped with cupholders in
the second row.
Overhead Console (Without Rail)
Storage Bin
If your vehicle has an overhead console without the
rail system, it has two reading lights, a courtesy
light, and a switchbank. See Overhead Console
Switchbank on page 211 for more information.
Your vehicle may have a storage bin located on
the overhead rail that you can use for storage.
Overhead Console (With Rail)
If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead
console, it may contain the following:
• Reading lamps. See Front Reading Lamps on
page 209 or Rear Reading Lamps on
page 209.
• Switchbank. See Overhead Console
Switchbank on page 211.
• OnStar® System buttons. See OnStar®
System on page 167.
• Universal Home Remote buttons. See
Universal Home Remote System (With Three
Round LED) on page 169 or Universal Home
Remote System (With One Triangular LED) on
page 170.
See your dealer to purchase additional items for
the rail system.
If your bin is equipped with the finger size latches
do the following:
1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in the
desired location.
2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supporting
it with one hand.
3. Push in on the latch and then rotate it
90 degrees.
181
If your bin is equipped with the hand size latches
do the following:
1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in the
desired location.
2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supporting
it with one hand.
3. The bin will snap into place.
4. Firmly press down making sure the latch is
flat with the ribs (A) on the storage bin.
5. Switch hands and repeat Steps 2 through 4
for the latch on the opposite side of the
storage bin.
6. Reverse these steps in order to remove the
storage bin.
4. To remove the bin, support the bin with one
hand while pulling each latch up and away
from the bin.
182
The contents of the bin should never weigh more
than 1.5 lbs (0.7 kg).
Always make sure to close and latch the bin
before driving.
Second Row Center Console
Floor Console Storage Area
Removing the Center Console
If your vehicle has a storage compartment located
on the front console below the front cupholders.
Pull up and then forward on the handle to open the
storage compartment.
Folding Tray
If your vehicle has the second row center console,
use the following procedure to remove or install
the console.
1. Locate the attachment lever in an opening on
the rear of the console
2. Pull the attachment lever upward to release
the attachment hook.
3. Lift the console up to remove it from the
vehicle.
Your vehicle may be
equipped with folding
convenience trays
located between seats.
To use each tray lift up
on the handle located on
its front end, while
pulling up on the tray to
lock it into place. There
are four cupholders on
each tray.
183
Replacing the Center Console
{CAUTION:
A second row center console that is not
locked into place properly can move
around in a crash or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to
lock the console into place properly when
installing it.
1. Position the second row center console above
the forward floor attachments between the
second row bucket seats.
For information on installing the seats, see
Rear Seat Operation on page 13.
2. Place the console’s front hooks onto the
forward floor attachments.
3. Locate the attachment lever at the rear of the
console and pull up.
4. Rock the rear attachment bracket onto the
floor attachment and release the lever.
5. Pull up on the console to ensure the rear
attachment hook is latched.
184
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of
your vehicle that is longer or wider than
the luggage carrier — like paneling,
plywood, a mattress and so forth — the
wind can catch it as you drive along. This
can cause you to lose control. What you
are carrying could be violently torn off,
and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage
your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never
carry something longer or wider than the
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are not
standard on this vehicle and must be purchased at
your dealer.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle
may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that
it rests on the slats as far forward as
possible and against the side rails, making
sure to fasten it securely.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity
when loading your vehicle. For more information
on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 404.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are
driving, check now and then to make sure
the cargo is still securely fastened.
Convenience Net (With Rear
Convenience Center)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
convenience net is designed to help keep
small loads, from falling out of the vehicle when
the liftgate is opened. Install the convenience
net at the rear of your vehicle, inside the liftgate.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on both
sides of the liftgate opening. The label on the
net should be in the upper left corner.
2. Attach the lower loops to the tabs at the rear
edge of the rear convenience center.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take
down the convenience net to extend the life of
the net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keep
the rear exit clear.
185
Convenience Net (Without Rear
Convenience Center)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
convenience net is designed to help keep
small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over.
Install the convenience net at the rear of your
vehicle, inside the liftgate.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on both
sides of the liftgate opening. The label on the
net should be in the upper left corner.
2. Attach the lower hooks to the metal rings on
the floor.
3. Once you have loaded items into the net,
stretch the higher side of the net up and over
the top of the load to hold it firmly in place.
The convenience net has a maximum capacity of
100 lbs (45 kg). It is not designed to hold
larger, heavier loads. Store such loads on the floor
of your vehicle, as far forward as you can.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take
down the convenience net to extend the life of
the net and to help retain its elasticity, and to keep
the rear exit clear.
186
Convenience Center
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the
vehicle could be injured. Be sure to
secure any such item properly.
Your vehicle may have a convenience center. It
provides extra storage space for the rear of
the vehicle.
To open the convenience center, pull up on the
door latch located on the front of the cover.
The convenience center cover has two automatic
prop rods to hold it up and in place.
To close the convenience center cover, you must
pull one of the prop rod linkages toward you
while holding onto the door latch and lower the
convenience center cover to close it.
Removing the Convenience Center
1. Make sure that all items are off the
convenience center and that it is empty.
2. Turn the hand knob, located at the rear of the
convenience center, counterclockwise until the
knob is loose.
3. Lift up on the hand knob, then grip and pull
up on the convenience center to remove it
from the vehicle.
Replacing the Convenience Center
1. Make sure the third row seat is properly
installed in the vehicle. See Third Row Seat on
page 27 for more information. If the third
row seat is not in the vehicle with the
convenience center, the convenience center
will not be locked into the correct position
in the vehicle.
2. Make sure that the convenience center is
empty and closed.
3. Lift the convenience center up and into the
rear of the vehicle.
4. Slide the convenience center in and align it to
the rear seat.
5. Press down on the front of the convenience
center so the center is aligned on the sill
mounting bracket.
6. Turn the hand knob clockwise until it is tight.
7. Pull up on the convenience center to make
sure it is locked into place.
The cover of the convenience center can be left in
its upright position while the vehicle is moving.
The convenience center and the third row
seat both have a maximum weight capacity of
400 lbs (181.6 kg).
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
187
✍ NOTES
188
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 192
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 194
Other Warning Devices ............................. 194
Horn .......................................................... 194
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 195
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 195
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 196
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 197
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 197
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 197
Windshield Washer .................................... 198
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 199
Cruise Control ........................................... 200
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 204
Wiper Activated Headlamps ....................... 205
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 205
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic
Headlamp System .................................. 205
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 206
Interior Lamps Control ............................... 207
Dome Lamp .............................................. 207
Entry Lighting ............................................ 208
Delayed Lighting ........................................ 208
Exit Lighting .............................................. 209
Front Reading Lamps ................................ 209
Rear Reading Lamps ................................ 209
Cargo Lamp .............................................. 210
Electric Power Management ...................... 210
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 211
Overhead Console Switchbank .................. 211
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 212
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 214
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current .................................................. 215
Cigarette Lighter ........................................ 216
Climate Controls ......................................... 217
Climate Control System ............................. 217
Dual Climate Control System ..................... 220
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 223
Rear Climate Control System
(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 224
Rear Climate Control System
(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 226
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 228
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 230
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 231
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 232
Trip Odometer ........................................... 232
Tachometer ............................................... 232
189
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 232
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 233
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 234
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 235
Charging System Light .............................. 237
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 238
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 239
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ........................................ 240
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 241
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 242
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 246
Security Light ............................................ 247
Cruise Control Light .................................. 247
Highbeam On Light ................................... 247
Fuel Gage ................................................. 248
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 248
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 249
DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 249
DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) ..................... 254
DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 256
DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only) ........................................ 275
190
Audio System(s) ......................................... 284
Setting the Time ........................................ 285
Radio with CD ........................................... 286
Using an MP3 ........................................... 301
XM Radio Messages ................................. 307
Navigation/Radio System ........................... 309
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 309
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 324
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(Option A, Uplevel) ................................ 340
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(Option B, Uplevel) ................................ 343
Mobile Digital Media System ..................... 345
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 367
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 367
Radio Reception ........................................ 368
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 369
Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 369
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 370
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 370
Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 370
✍ NOTES
191
Instrument Panel Overview
192
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on
page 223.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 195.
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 367.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 231.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls (If
Equipped). See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 249.
F. Traction Control System Button (If Equipped).
See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 379.
G. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 194.
H. Passenger Airbag Status And Passenger
Seatbelt Reminder Indicator. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 235 and
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light on
page 233.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 284.
J. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 204.
K. Interior Lamps Control. See Interior Lamps
Control on page 207. Instrument Panel
Brightness Control. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 206.
L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on
page 437.
M. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on
page 159.
N. Horn. See Horn on page 194.
O. Cruise Controls (If Equipped). See Cruise
Control on page 200.
P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
on page 217. Dual Climate Controls. See
Dual Climate Control System on page 220.
Q. Heated Seat Controls (If Equipped). See
Heated Seats on page 10.
R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 180.
193
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem.
Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them
up at the side of the road about 300 feet
(100 m) behind your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is
not in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
turn signals will not work.
194
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering
wheel to the highest level to give your legs more
room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel
is located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold
the wheel and pull the
lever. Then move
the wheel to a
comfortable position and
release the lever to
lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 196.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 197.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 197.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield
Wipers on page 197.
195
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 198.
• Z Rear Window Wiper. See Windshield
Washer on page 198.
• = Rear Window Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 198.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 204.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the direction
of the turn or lane
change.
196
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the
lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it
there until you complete your lane change. The
lever will return by itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see your
turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when
you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and
check the fuse. See Bulb Replacement on
page 471 and Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 527.
If you have a trailer towing option with added
wiring for the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will
flash at a normal rate even if a turn signal bulb
is burned out. Check the front and rear turn signal
lamps regularly to make sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver
know to turn it off. If you need to leave the signal
on for more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the
signal and then turn it back on.
When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward
you to momentarily turn on the high beams.
This will signal that you are going to pass. When
you release the lever, they will turn off.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to
high beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever
away from you.
When the high beams
are on, this light will
appear on the
instrument panel cluster.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the
band with the wiper symbol on it.
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the
band to mist. Hold it there until the wipers start.
Then let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If
you want more wipes, hold the band on mist
longer.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band
to off.
N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a
To change the headlamps from high beam to low
beam, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward you.
long or short delay between wipes. This can
be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band
to choose the delay time. The closer to the top
of the lever, the shorter the delay.
197
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low
speed, turn the band away from you to the
first solid band past the delay settings. For
high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings. To stop
the wipers, move the band to off.
Windshield Washer
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn
the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
When you release the paddle, the washers will
stop, and the wipers will continue to operate
for two cycles, unless your wipers had already
been on. In that case, the wipers will resume the
wiper speed you had selected earlier.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they are frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If
your blades do become worn or damaged, get
new blades or blade inserts.
LQ (Windshield Washer): Press and hold the
windshield washer paddle with this symbol on
it to wash your windshield. The washers and
wipers will operate.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
198
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn
the rear washers/wipers off.
Z (Rear Wiper): Move the lever to this position
{CAUTION:
to turn the rear wipers on.
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
If your vehicle has the
rear window washer/
wiper, the controls are
located on the end of the
turn signal/multifunction
lever.
= (Rear Washer/Wiper): Move the lever to this
position to wash and wipe the rear window.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle
as the windshield washer. However, the rear
window washer will run out of fluid before
the windshield washer. If you can wash your
windshield but not your rear window, check the
fluid level.
199
Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
If your vehicle has
cruise control, the lever
is located below the
windshield wiper control
on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Q RES + (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever
up to resume the cruise control speed, or to
accelerate when passing another vehicle.
J (CRUISE CONTROL) ON/OFF q: Press the
button on the end of the lever to turn the cruise
control on. Press it again to turn cruise control off.
R SET — (Set/Coast/Decelerate): Push the
lever down to set the cruise speed. If the cruise
speed is already set this position can be used
to coast or decelerate from a higher speed.
CANCEL R: Pull the lever to cancel the cruise
control speed.
200
Cruise control allows a speed of approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more to be maintained
without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This
is helpful on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel
spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 379. When road conditions allow, the
cruise control can be used again.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do
not want to. You could be startled and
even lose control. Keep the cruise control
switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
1. Push the button at the end of the cruise
control lever to turn the cruise control on.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Push down on the cruise control lever and
release it. This will set the speed in cruise
control.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
201
This symbol will appear
on the instrument panel
cluster when the
cruise control is set.
the lever is released or the brakes are applied.
Do not continue to hold the lever in the plus
(resume/accelerate) position, unless a faster speed
is desired.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
This symbol will disappear when the brakes are
applied or the cruise control is cancelled. It
will reappear when the set cruise speed is
resumed.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and
then the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts
off. But the cruise control does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, the cruise control lever
can be pushed upward toward the plus
(resume/accelerate) position to return to the preset
cruise speed.
The vehicle will return to and stay at the preset
cruise speed. If the cruise control lever is pushed
up and held toward the plus (resume/accelerate)
position, the vehicle speed will increase until
202
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Push up on the cruise control lever
toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position,
then release the lever and take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now
cruise at the higher speed.
• Push up and hold the cruise control lever
toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position
until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
Then release the cruise control lever. To
increase the vehicle’s speed in very small
amounts, push up briefly on the cruise control
lever and release it. Each time this is done,
the vehicle will speed up approximately
one mph (1.6 km/h).
The acceleration feature will only work after the
cruise control speed has been set by pushing the
cruise control lever down to the set position.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed
while using cruise control:
• Push the cruise control lever downward
toward the minus (set/coast/decelerate)
position until a lower speed is reached, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
cruise control lever downward toward the
minus (set/coast/decelerate) position briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle will
slow down approximately one mph (1.6 km/h).
used in order to maintain the vehicle’s speed.
When going downhill, the brakes might have to be
applied, or the transaxle might have to be
shifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Doing either of these things will take the
vehicle out of cruise. It may be better not to
use the cruise control if the brakes constantly have
to be applied, or the vehicle continuously needs
to be shifted to a lower gear.
Cancelling Cruise Control
To cancel a cruise control session, pull the cruise
control lever forward, or step lightly on the
brake pedal.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Doing either of these things will only end the
current cruise control session, but the set speed
will be retained in memory.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control
speed set earlier.
Push the button at the end of the cruise control
lever to turn the system off.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
When the cruise control or the ignition is turned
off, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
How well the cruise control will work on hills
depends upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, and
the steepness of the hills. When going up
steep hills, the accelerator pedal might have to be
Erasing Speed Memory
203
Exterior Lamps
The control to the left of
the steering column
operates the exterior
lamps.
9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to
toggle off all lamps. This is a momentary control
that will spring back to AUTO when released.
This momentary control will turn the automatic
headlamps and/or the Daytime Running Lamps on
and off for U.S. vehicles. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, this is only true when the transaxle is in
PARK (P).
204
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this
position to set your headlamps in automatic mode.
AUTO mode, if enabled, will turn the exterior
lamps on and off automatically depending on how
much light is available outside the vehicle.
Due to the momentary switch design, your
automatic lights may be disabled even if the
control is in the AUTO position.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
position to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following:
• Taillamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Headlamps on Reminder
This feature, if equipped, will automatically
activate the headlamps and parking lamps after
the windshield wipers have been in use for
about 30 seconds and when all of the following
conditions are met.
• The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
• The headlamps have not already been
activated by automatic lighting.
• The automatic lighting feature has not been
disabled using the exterior lamp control.
If you turn the ignition to LOCK while leaving the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime once
the driver’s door is opened.
See Exterior Lamps on page 204 for additional
information.
If the wipers are activated for over 30 seconds
and the exterior lamp control is in the parking
lamps position, or the automatic lighting feature
has been disabled using the exterior lamp control,
a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
appear on the Driver Information Center, if
equipped.
Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it
easier for others to see the front of your vehicle
during the day. DRL can be helpful in many
different driving conditions, but they can be
especially helpful in the short periods after dawn
and before sunset. Fully functional Daytime
Running Lamps are required on all vehicles first
sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel
makes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
The DRL system will make front parking and
turn signal lamps come on in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is off.
205
When the DRL are on, only your front turn signal
lamps will be on. Your instrument panel will
not be lit up.
When it is dark enough outside, the exterior lamps
will come on automatically. When it is bright
enough outside, the exterior lamps will turn off and
the DRL will turn on. Of course, you may still
turn on the headlamps any time you need to.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage,
the automatic headlamp system will come on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will
take approximately 30 seconds for the automatic
headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, your instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make
sure your instrument panel brightness control is
in the full bright position. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 206.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automatic
headlamps off, toggle the exterior lamp control
to off after starting the vehicle.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
206
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob to adjust the
instrument panel
brightness is located in
the center of the
interior lamp controls.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights and
counterclockwise to dim them.
Interior Lamps Control
The interior lamp control
is located to the right of
the exterior lamp
controls on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering
column.
1 (Door): Turn the outer knob to this position to
turn the interior lamps on while any door is
open and when the ignition key is removed from
the ignition.
+ (Interior Lamps): Turn the outer knob to this
position to turn the interior lamps on.
Turn the inner knob to adjust the instrument panel
brightness, described earlier in this section.
Dome Lamp
R (Interior Lamp Override): Turn the outer
knob to this position to have your interior lamps
remain off while any door is open.
The dome lamp is located in the headliner and
has two buttons to manually turn it on or off. The
dome lamp will come on each time you open
a door, unless you turn on the interior lamps
override feature. See Interior Lamps Control on
page 207.
207
Entry Lighting
Delayed Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle is
illuminated so that you can see inside before
you enter your vehicle. The lamps will come on for
20 seconds if you unlock your door using your
key or the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
ignition is in LOCK. After 20 seconds have
passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade out. The
lamps will turn off before the 20 seconds if you
do one of the following:
• Lock all the doors using the key.
• Press lock on the power door lock switch.
• Press lock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
The delayed lighting feature will continue to
illuminate the interior for 20 seconds after all doors
have been closed, so that you can find your
ignition and buckle your safety belt at night.
Delayed lighting will not occur while the ignition is
in RUN or ACCESSORY. After 20 seconds
have passed, the interior lamps will slowly fade
out. The lamps will fade out before the 20 seconds
have passed if you do one of the following:
• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
• Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
• Lock all doors using the power door lock
switch or the key.
When any door is opened, entry lighting is
cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while
any door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out
when all doors and the liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after all doors have been closed if they have not
been locked. See Delayed Lighting on page 208.
To turn the entry lighting feature off or on, see DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 275.
208
To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see
DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 275.
Exit Lighting
Front Reading Lamps
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on
for about 25 seconds whenever you remove
the key from the ignition. If you turn the ignition
key to RUN or ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade
out. The lamps will also fade out if you lock the
doors with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
There are two reading lamps and one courtesy
lamp in the overhead console. To turn either
reading lamp on or off, press the lens of the lamp.
The courtesy lamp will come on each time you
open a door, unless you turn on the interior lamps
override feature. See Interior Lamps Control on
page 207.
When any door is opened, exit lighting is
cancelled. The interior lamps will stay on while
any door or the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out
when all doors and the liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to
20 seconds after all doors have been closed if
they have not been locked. See Delayed Lighting
on page 208.
To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 275.
Rear Reading Lamps
There are two reading lamps in the third row
headliner. To turn either reading lamp on or off,
press the lens of the lamp.
There may also be a reading lamp in the second
row, integrated with the dome lamp. To turn
the second row reading lamp on or off, press the
button next to the lamp lens.
209
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located in the rear of your
vehicle, above the liftgate opening, and does not
have a switch. The cargo lamp will come on
each time you open a door, unless you turn on the
interior lamps override. See Interior Lamps
Control on page 207.
Electric Power Management
This vehicle has Electric Power Management
(EPM), an advanced control system. It estimates
the battery’s temperature and state of charge
and then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage, you may
see the voltage move up or down. This is normal.
If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for all
vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)
210
may not be spinning fast enough at idle to
produce all the power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action, this action may
be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver
Information Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Battery
Voltage Low. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical
loads as much as possible.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you
from draining the battery, in case you accidentally
leave the interior lamps on. If you leave any
interior lamps on while the ignition is in lock or off,
they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.
The lamps will not come back on again until
you do one of the following:
• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY
• Open a closed door, or close and reopen
a door.
• Turn the interior lamps on if they are in the
door or override position.
• Turn the interior lamps to the door or override
position and then to on again if the interior
lamp control is in the on position.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off
the lamps after only three minutes.
Overhead Console Switchbank
The overhead console switchbank is located in the
overhead console. This switchbank may include
the following:
• Power Sliding Door(s)/Override Switch(es).
See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 134.
• Power Rear Quarter Windows. See Power
Rear Quarter Windows on page 145.
• Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
Disable Switch. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) on page 212.
If your vehicle does not have some of these
options, there will be a blank.
211
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system, it is designed to
help you park, while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R).
It operates only at very low speeds, less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). URPA can help make parking easier and
to help you avoid colliding with objects such as
parked vehicles. The URPA system can detect
objects up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and
tell you how close these objects are from your rear
bumper.
Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever
is moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle
speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic
sensors located at the rear bumper are used to
detect the distance to the object. The URPA
display is located inside the vehicle, near the rear
window. It has three color-coded lights used to
provide distance and system information to
the driver.
212
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
URPA does not:
• Operate above speeds of 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• Detect objects more than 5 feet
(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle. This
distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
• Detect objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the vehicle, or
that are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
So if you do not use proper care before
backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,
pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even
though the vehicle has the URPA system,
always check carefully before backing up
by checking behind your vehicle.
URPA can be turned off
by pressing the rear
park aid disable switch
located in the
overhead console
switchbank.
While the system is disabled, an indicator light will
be lit on the switch. You will not see any lights
on the rear display if the switch is in the off
position.
How the System Works
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on
automatically when the shift lever is moved into
REVERSE (R). When the system turns on,
the three lights on the display will illuminate for
one and a half seconds to let you know that
the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the red light will flash to remind you that
the system does not work at speed greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed
of less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following
will occur:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
20 in
0.5 m
1 ft
0.3 m
A chime will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet
(1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate
level. In order for the rear sensors to recognize
an object, it must be within detection range behind
the vehicle.
213
When the System Does Not Seem to Work
Properly
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are
not kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush.
Other conditions that may affect system
performance include things like the vibrations from
a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes
on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash
red, see your dealer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
bicycle or an object was on the back of, or hanging
out of your liftgate during your last drive cycle,
the light may also flash red. The light will continue
to flash whenever in REVERSE (R) until your
vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h)
without any obstructions behind the vehicle.
214
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a front
accessory power outlet located below the climate
controls on the instrument panel. It can be
used to plug in electrical equipment such as a
cellular telephone or CB radio.
Pull the cover down to use the accessory power
outlet. When not in use, keep the cover on.
The rear accessory power outlet is located on the
rear compartment on the driver’s side.
To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover
and pull it off. To put the cover back on, line up the
tabs at the back of the cover and put the cover
in place. Push down the tab to secure the cover.
When not in use, always cover the rear
accessory power outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on
for extended periods will drain the battery.
Always turn off electrical equipment when not
in use and do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem see your dealer for
additional information on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
Your vehicle may have a power outlet that can be
used to plug in auxiliary electrical equipment
with a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try to
use equipment that requires more than the limit, a
protection circuit will cut the power supply. To
reset the outlet, unplug the item and plug it back
in or turn the ignition to LOCK or ACCESSORY
and then back on. The power will automatically
restart when equipment that operates within
the limit is plugged in.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
215
The power outlet is
located behind the third
row seats on the
passenger’s side rear
quarter trim panel.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and may not work properly
if these items are plugged into the power outlet:
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage
such as: compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply such as:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets,
touch sensor lamps, etc.
216
Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have a cigarette lighter. To use
the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way
and let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by
itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating may occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in
while it is heating.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
Climate Controls
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
Climate Control System
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets, then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air
is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to
the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to
the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the
front seats free of objects that could obstruct
airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
Outside Air: This mode will be automatically
selected when your vehicle is in any mode except
maximum air conditioning.
217
A (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan.
The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning
compressor to operate.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the air temperature inside your
vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When it
is pressed, an indicator light in the button will come
on to let you know that air conditioning is
activated.
You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
The system is designed to make adjustments to
help with fuel economy while still maintaining
the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce
the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.
It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
218
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
@ MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning):
Turn the right knob to this position for maximum air
conditioning. This will select air conditioning and
recirculation for maximum cooling of your
vehicle. This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
Recirculation: This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
more quickly. This mode will automatically be
selected when you select maximum air
conditioning.
( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn on
the heated seats. The button on the left controls
the driver’s seat and the button on the right
controls the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seats
on page 10 for additional information.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity, or moisture, condensing on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two
modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of
fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use
the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. When you select
this mode, the system runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot
be selected while in the defog mode.
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
the windshield and the side window outlets, with
some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically run the
air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
If your vehicle has a rear window defogger a
warming grid is used to remove fog from the rear
window.
< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An indicator light in the
button will come on to let you know that the
rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for about
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can
also be turned off by pressing the button again
or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
219
Dual Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have a dual climate control
system. With this system you can control the
heating, cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.
Temperature Control: Use the driver’s and
passenger’s levers to increase or decrease the air
temperature inside your vehicle.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
@ MAX A/C (Maximum Air
Conditioning): Turn the right knob to this position
for maximum air conditioning. This will select air
conditioning and recirculation for maximum cooling
of your vehicle.
Operation
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan.
The fan must be turned on for the air conditioning
compressor to operate.
220
Recirculation: This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
more quickly. This mode will automatically be
selected when maximum air conditioning is
selected.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets, then directs the
remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air
is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to
the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to
the rear of the vehicle. Keep the area under the
front seats free of objects that could obstruct
airflow to the rear of the vehicle.
Outside Air: This mode is automatically selected
when your vehicle is in any mode except
maximum air conditioning.
You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
The system is designed to make adjustments to
help with fuel economy while still maintaining
the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them and switch to
maximum air conditioning mode. This helps to
reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to
cool down. It also helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn on
turn the air conditioning system on or off. When it
is pressed, an indicator light in the button will
come on to let you know that air conditioning is
activated.
the heated seats. The button on the left controls
the driver’s seat and the button on the right
controls the passenger’s seat. See Heated Seats
on page 10 for additional information.
221
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity, or moisture, condensing on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. There are two
modes to clear fog or frost from your windshield.
Use the defog mode to clear the windows of
fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use
the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from
the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs air to the
windshield and the floor outlets. When this mode
is selected, the system runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while
in the defog mode.
222
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to
the windshield and the side window outlets, with
some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically run the air
conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are
clear.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this position
to open the air outlets.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An
indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for about
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can
also be turned off by pressing the button again
or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this position
to close the air outlets.
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to
change the direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the vehicle that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the
system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
223
Rear Climate Control System
(Option A, Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have a rear climate control
system that allows the driver to adjust the
fan speed for the rear seating area. This system
works with the main climate control system in your
vehicle.
A (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increase
or decrease airflow to the rear seating area.
Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.
AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rear
passengers to adjust the temperature and airflow
to the rear seating area.
Your vehicle may also have a rear climate control
system that allows the rear passengers to
adjust the temperature and fan speed for the rear
seating area.
When the front climate control is in AUX and the
rear climate control fan or temperature button
is pressed, the display will show the same airflow
modes as the front climate control system. See
Dual Climate Control System on page 220.
This lever is located below the main climate
control system on the instrument panel. Use this
lever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seat
passengers.
224
t r (Decrease Setting): Press this button to
decrease the fan or temperature setting when
arrows are active in the display.
[ u (Increase Setting): Press this button to
increase the fan or temperature setting when
arrows are active in display.
The front control must be in AUX position to enable
adjustment of the temperature and fan speed on the
rear control system. If it is not in AUX, pressing the
fan or temperature button on the rear climate
control will show a DISABLED message on the rear
seat entertainment system display.
9 (Fan): Press this button to increase or
decrease fan speed. After pressing this button,
arrows and a fan will appear in the display.
The arrows indicate that to increase or decrease
fan speed, you need to press either the left or right
arrow button. The displayed arrows and fan will
disappear after a few seconds.
b (Temperature): Press this button to increase or
decrease temperature. After pressing this
button, arrows and a temperature scale will appear
in the display. The arrows indicate that to
increase or decrease temperature, you need to
press either the left or right arrow button. The
displayed arrows and temperature scale will
disappear after a few seconds.
225
Rear Air Outlets
The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air
return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from
obstructions. Also, keep the area around the base
of the center instrument panel console, between
and under the front seats, free of objects that could
also obstruct airflow to the rear seating area.
For more information on how to use the main
climate control system, see Dual Climate Control
System on page 220. For information on
ventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 223.
Rear Climate Control System
(Option B, Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have a rear climate control
system that allows the driver to adjust the
fan speed for the rear seating area. This system
works with the main climate control system in your
vehicle.
This lever is located below the main climate
control system on the instrument panel. Use this
lever to adjust the fan speed for the rear seat
passengers.
A (Fan): Slide the lever to 1, 2, or 3 to increase
or decrease airflow to the rear seating area.
Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.
AUX: Slide the lever to AUX to allow the rear
passengers to adjust the temperature and airflow
to the rear seating area.
Your vehicle may also have a rear climate control
system that allows the rear passengers to
adjust the temperature and fan speed for the rear
seating area.
226
When the front climate control is in AUX and the
rear climate control fan or temperature button
is pressed, the display will show the same airflow
modes as the front climate control system. See
Dual Climate Control System on page 220.
The front control must be in AUX position to enable
adjustment of the temperature and fan speed on the
rear control system. If it is not in AUX, pressing the
fan or temperature button on the rear climate
control will show a DISABLED message on the rear
seat entertainment system display.
q g (Decrease Setting): Press this button to
decrease the fan or temperature setting when
arrows are active in the display.
9 (Fan)b (Temperature): Press this button once
to enable adjustment of the fan speed. After
pressing this button, the current fan speed setting
will be highlighted and appear in the on screen
display. The arrows indicate that to increase
or decrease fan speed, you need to press either
the left or right arrow button. The on screen display
will disappear after a few seconds.
Press this button twice to enable temperature
adjustment. After pressing this button, the current
temperature settings will be highlighted and
appear in the on screen display. The arrows
indicate that to increase or decrease temperature,
you need to press either the left or right arrow
button. The on screen display will disappear after
a few seconds.
Pressing this button a third time will turn off the on
screen display.
QR: Press the up and down arrows to toggle
between the fan and temperature settings.
r l (Increase Setting): Press this button to
increase the fan or temperature setting when
arrows are active in the display.
227
Rear Air Outlets
The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air
return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from
obstructions. Also, keep the area around the base
of the center instrument panel console, between
and under the front seats, free of objects that could
also obstruct airflow to the rear seating area.
The access panel for the passenger compartment
air filter is located in the back of the glove box.
To replace the filter, do the following:
For more information on how to use the main
climate control system, see Dual Climate Control
System on page 220. For information on
ventilation, see Outlet Adjustment on page 223.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment filter. The filter removes most
particles from the air, including dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more
quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs
to be replaced early. For how often to change
the air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on
page 539.
228
1. Pull the tab located on the outer access panel
up and out.
4. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Make
sure the filters are inserted so that the sealing
foam is angled in the same direction on
both filters. For the type of filter to use, see
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 550.
5. Close the inner access door, while squeezing
the tab. Be sure it is tightly closed.
6. Snap the outer access panel into the back of
the glove box.
2. Then push the tab, located on the left of the
inner access panel, to the right.
3. The first air filter will pull straight out. To
remove the second, reach in and slide it
toward the opening. Pull the second filter out.
229
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they’re
working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
230
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there’s a problem with your
vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on when you are driving, or when one of the
gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about
it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly — and even dangerous.
So please get to know your warning lights and
gages. They’re a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll
know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive
safely and economically. The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.
United States version shown, Canada similar
231
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per
hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your
vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used
in the United States) or kilometers (used in
Canada).
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle
needs a new odometer installed. The new one can
be set to the mileage total of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can display how far you have
driven since you last reset it.
For more information see DIC Operation and
Displays on page 249.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
232
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several
seconds, then it will
flash for several more.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in motion, the chime
and safety belt light will be repeated. You should
buckle your seat belt. If the driver’s belt is
already buckled, neither the chime nor the light
will come on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will come on for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if a passenger is
detected by the passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 106 for more
information. The passenger safety belt light will also
come on and stay on for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
You should have the
passenger buckle their
safety belt.
This light and chime reminder will be repeated if
the ignition is on, the vehicle is in motion, the
passenger is still unbuckled and the passenger
airbag is enabled.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
233
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical
system for malfunctions. The light comes on if
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 96.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
234
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
side impact airbag (if equipped).
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped). A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
235
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great
if the airbag deploys.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat the unless passenger airbag
status indicator shows off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and side
impact airbag (if equipped) if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
236
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s airbag or airbags. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 106 for more
on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens,
have the vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of an airbag. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 234.
Charging System Light
The charging system
light will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, but the
engine is not running,
as a check to show you
it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it
stays on, or comes on while you are driving,
you may have a problem with the charging system.
It could indicate that you have problems with a
generator drive belt, or another electrical problem.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and air conditioner.
237
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the
other part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
238
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal
may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light on page 239 and Towing Your
Vehicle on page 410.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
Your vehicle has an
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) warning light.
This light should come on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If this light stays on longer than normal after you
have started your engine, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on and stays on when you are
driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the
ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on, or comes on
again while you are driving, the ABS needs service
and you do not have anti-lock brakes.
239
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a traction control
system warning light.
The traction control system warning light may
come on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the
traction control button. To turn the system
back on, press the button again. The warning
light should go off. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 379 for more
information.
240
• If there’s a brake system problem that is
specifically related to traction control, the
traction control system will turn off and
the warning light will come on. If your brakes
begin to overheat, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning light will
come on until your brakes cool down.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn
off and the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of
time when the system is turned on, your vehicle
needs service.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the red gage lamp turns on, your engine is
too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under
normal driving conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 451.
United States
Canada
241
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
242
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, your emission
controls may not work as well, your fuel
economy may not be as good, and your engine
may not run as smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that may not be covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 426.
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is
possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
243
If the Light Is On Steady
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 429. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 433.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A
loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of
water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
244
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if you have recently replaced your
battery or if your battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This may take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does
not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
245
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may
Oil Pressure Light
If your vehicle has low
engine oil pressure, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving
enough oil. The engine could be low on oil,
or could have some other oil problem. Have it
fixed immediately by your dealer.
The oil light could also come on in three other
situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to
show you it is working. The light will go
out when you turn the ignition on. If it does
not come on with the ignition on, you
may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.
Have it fixed right away.
246
blink on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come
on for a moment. This is normal.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
For information
regarding this light, see
Theft-Deterrent
Systems on page 145.
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps or the
Flash-to-Pass feature is
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 197.
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is
turned off. See Cruise Control on page 200
for more information.
247
Fuel Gage
United States
Canada
When the indicator nears empty, you still have a
little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you
have left when the ignition is on.
Here are four things some owners ask about. All
these things are normal and do not indicate
that anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up
than the gage reads. For example, the
gage read half full, but it took more (or less)
than half of the tank’s capacity to fill it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate empty when the
ignition is turned off.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly
when you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on
fuel. To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.
248
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information
Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display
located in the instrument panel cluster, below the
tachometer. The DIC buttons are located on
the center of the instrument panel, below the
center outlets.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
short delay, the DIC will display WELCOME
DRIVER (1 or 2) if a personalized key 1 or 2 is
used, and then the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off. The
driver number also corresponds to the numbers,
1 or 2, on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitters.
The DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers,
fuel economy, trip computer, vehicle system
information, and compass display, if equipped. It
also displays warning messages if a system
problem is detected. In addition, the DIC displays
phone numbers that are called using the
OnStar® system, if equipped. See OnStar®
System on page 167.
If equipped, the outside air temperature
automatically appears in the bottom right corner of
the DIC display when viewing all of the information
screens, except for the oil life screens. If the
outside air temperature is at or below 37°F (3°C),
the temperature reading will toggle between
displaying the outside temperature and the word
ICE for two minutes. If there is a problem with the
system that controls the temperature display,
the letters OC (open circuit) or SC (short circuit)
will appear on the display. If this occurs, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
The DIC also allows some features to be
customized or personalized, if equipped. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 275 for more information.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different modes which can be
accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on
the center of the instrument panel. The buttons
are the information, set/reset, and menu buttons.
The button functions are detailed in the following
pages.
249
DIC Buttons
Information Button Items
Q4R (Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following items:
Odometer
Q4R (Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip distance, time elapsed,
average speed, fuel economy, battery voltage, oil
life, and to turn off the DIC.
r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
q (Menu): Press this button to display the units,
language, personalization, if equipped, compass
zone and compass calibration, if equipped.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 275 and DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) on
page 254 for more information.
250
Press the information button until the odometer
displays. This mode shows the distance the
vehicle has been driven in either miles or
kilometers.
Trip A and Trip B
Press the information button until A or B displays.
This mode shows the current distance traveled
in either miles or kilometers since the last reset for
each trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be
used at the same time.
The display will show the odometer on the top line
and the trip odometer information, either A or B,
on the bottom line.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing the set/reset button while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
There is also a retroactive trip odometer function
that performs the following for each trip
odometer:
• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph
(5 km/h) during the current ignition cycle,
this function will set the trip odometer to the
distance driven during the current ignition
cycle.
• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded 3 mph
(5 km/h), this function will set the trip odometer
to the distance driven during the previous
ignition cycle plus the distance driven during
the current ignition cycle.
Press and hold the set/reset button for
three seconds, then release the button. The
retroactive trip odometer value will be set into the
currently displayed trip odometer.
Time Elapsed
Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press the
set/reset button to start the timing feature.
Press the set/reset button again to stop it. If you
will be starting and stopping your vehicle, during a
trip for instance, the TIME ELAPSED feature
will automatically start timing where it left off when
you last stopped. To reset it, press and hold
the set/reset button for approximately 1.5 seconds.
The display will return to zero.
Average Speed
Press the information button until AVERAGE
SPEED displays. This mode shows the average
speed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph)
or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is
calculated based on the various vehicle speed
recorded since the last reset of this value. To reset
the value, press the information button to display
AVERAGE SPEED, then press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
Press the information button until TIME
ELAPSED :00 displays. This mode is like a
stopwatch, in that you can clock the time it takes
to get from one point to another. Each of the
fields for the hours, minutes, and seconds are
two numeric digits.
251
Fuel Range
Average Fuel Economy
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the approximate
number of remaining miles or kilometers the
vehicle can be driven without refueling.
Press the information button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This mode shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is
calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this menu item was
reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and
hold the set/reset button. The display will return
to zero.
Fuel range is based on several factors, including
distance travelled, fuel used, fuel capacity,
etc. This estimate will change if driving conditions
change. For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this mode may read one
number, but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway,
the number may change even though the
same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is
because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city
driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOW
will display followed by the LOW FUEL message.
See “LOW FUEL” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 256 for more information.
252
Battery
Press the information button until BATTERY
displays. This mode shows the current battery
voltage.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery
voltage may fluctuate when viewing this
information on the DIC. This is normal.
If there is a problem with the battery charging
system, a DIC message will display. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 256 for
more information.
Oil Life
Menu Button Items
Press the information button until OIL LIFE
displays. This mode shows an estimate of the oil’s
remaining useful life. If you see OIL LIFE 99%
on the display, that means 99% of the current oil
life remains. The engine oil life system will
alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
q (Menu): Press this button to scroll through the
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
You should change your oil as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil on page 439. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life,
additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 539 for more
information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself
after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
accidentally at any time other than when the oil
has just been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
System on page 442. The display will show 100%
when the system is reset.
following items:
Units
Press the menu button until UNITS displays. This
mode allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this mode,
press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC.
Language
Press the menu button until the language screen
displays. This mode allows you to select the
language in which the DIC messages will appear.
Once in this mode, press the set/reset button
to select among the following choices:
• English
• Francais (French)
• Espanol (Spanish)
253
Personalization (Uplevel Only)
Compass Calibration (Uplevel Only)
Press the menu button until PERSONAL
PROGRAM displays. Your vehicle may have
personalization capabilities that allow you
to program certain features to a preferred setting
for up to two drivers.
The compass can be manually calibrated. To
calibrate the compass through the DIC, see DIC
Compass (Uplevel Only) on page 254.
Your vehicle may also have customization
capabilities that allow you to program certain
features to one preferred setting. Customization
features can only be programmed to one setting on
the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a
preferred setting for up to two drivers. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only) on
page 275 for additional information on personal
programming.
Compass Zone (Uplevel Only)
Under certain circumstances, such as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to compensate for compass variance
and reset the zone. To change the compass zone
through the DIC, see DIC Compass (Uplevel
Only) on page 254.
254
DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONE
displays. Press the set/reset button to change the
compass zone. Zones 1 through 15 are available.
The direction the vehicle is moving will be
displayed in the top right corner of the DIC display.
Compass Calibration
Under certain circumstances, such as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to compensate for compass variance
and reset the zone through the DIC.
Compass variance is the difference between the
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, the compass in the vehicle could give
false readings.
In order to do this, the compass must be set or
calibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicle
is traveling.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
1. Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONE
displays.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and
variance zone number on the map.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through
and select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the menu button to advance to the
COMPASS CALIBRATION screen.
255
5. To start the compass calibration, press and
hold the set/reset button until CALIBRATION
BEGUN DRIVE UNTIL DONE appears in
the DIC display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be
cleared.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in a circle two times
to activate the compass.
When the calibration is complete, the DIC will
display CALIBRATION FINISHED.
7. If the message CAL appears in the DIC, you
must manually put the compass into the
calibration mode again. Repeat
Steps 1 through 6.
If there are any active warning messages when
the vehicle is turned off, two chimes sound and the
DIC goes into a reminder mode. The reminder
mode displays any active message. If there
are multiple messages, the DIC displays each
message for five seconds. After each active
message is displayed once, the reminder mode
turns off.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed by the driver
to correct the condition. Multiple messages may
appear one after another.
Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge that you received the message
and clear it from the DIC display.
256
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing
the messages will only make the messages
disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information about them.
A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTION
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 241. To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning compressor is
automatically turned off. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
This message displays when the system detects
that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a
reasonable level. The battery saver system starts
reducing certain features of the vehicle that
you may be able to notice. At the point that the
features are disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery.
This message comes on while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to
acknowledge this warning message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to
15.5 volts. You can monitor the battery voltage by
pressing the information button until BATTERY
displays.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on. If this message
continues to appear, have the system repaired by
your dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
257
CHANGE OIL SOON
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
This message displays when service is required
for the vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil on
page 439 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 539 for more information.
This message displays when there is a problem
with the generator and battery charging systems.
Driving with this problem could drain the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop
and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Have the electrical system checked by your
dealer immediately.
The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset by
acknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screen
under the gages menu on the DIC must also be
reset. See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 249 and Engine Oil Life System
on page 442.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to
acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
258
This message displays and a chime sounds while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear
it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap is not on, or
is not fully tightened. Check the fuel cap to
ensure that it is on properly. See Filling the Tank
on page 433 for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear
it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
DELAYED LOCKING
This message displays to inform the driver that
even though a door lock switch or the lock button
on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
has been pressed, that actual locking of the doors
is being delayed because the delayed locking
feature has been activated in the DIC.
See “DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 275
for more information.
This message appears and a chime sounds when
the ignition is off.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the driver’s door is
not closed properly. When this message appears,
make sure that the driver’s door is closed
completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted
out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
259
DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the driver’s side rear
door is not closed properly. When this message
appears, make sure that the driver’s side rear door
is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted
out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do
260
not increase the engine speed above normal
idling speed. See Engine Overheating on
page 451 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. The engine coolant
temperature warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 241 for more
information.
To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off the
air conditioner if it is on. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioner
can be turned back on.
This message displays only when the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear
it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
HOOD AJAR
This message displays when the amount of
available light outside of the vehicle is low, or the
windshield wipers have been on for approximately
30 seconds, and the exterior lamps control is
off or in the park lamps position. This message
informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps
is recommended. See Exterior Lamps on
page 204 for more information.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when the hood is not closed
properly. When this message appears, make sure
that the hood is closed completely. See Hood
Release on page 437.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to
acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
261
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the battery in the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to
be replaced. To replace the battery, see “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 121.
This message displays when the left front turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlamps
and Sidemarker Lamps on page 471.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
KEY IN IGNITION
This message displays and a chime sounds
continuously when the driver’s door is open and
the key is in ACCESSORY or LOCK.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message disappears and the chiming stops
when the key is removed from the ignition.
262
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the left rear turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
on page 473.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LIFT GATE AJAR
This message displays when the liftgate is not
closed completely. Make sure that the liftgate is
closed completely. See Liftgate on page 141.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted out
of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
LOW BRAKE FLUID
This message displays when the brake fluid level
is low. Have the brake system serviced by
your dealer as soon as possible. See Brakes on
page 462 for proper fluid level.
The brake system warning light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 238.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the
DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to
clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
263
LOW FUEL
This message displays when your vehicle is low
on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
See Fuel Gage on page 248 and Filling the Tank
on page 433 for more information.
The message displays and a chime sounds while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear
it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warning
message appears on the DIC display, stop the
vehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is
corrected. Severe engine damage can result
from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure.
See Engine Oil on page 439 for more
information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also
appears on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil
Pressure Light on page 246.
264
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage
can result from driving a vehicle with low oil
pressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer
as soon as possible when this message is
displayed.
This message displays only when the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds continuously when this
message is displayed.
This message cannot be acknowledged and
cleared from the screen. This message re-displays
for a few seconds if the condition still exists
when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
PARKING BRAKE ON
This message displays to alert the driver when the
vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in
RUN, and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h). Release the parking brake before
driving. See Parking Brake on page 159 for more
information.
The brake system warning light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 238.
A chime sounds continuously while this message
is displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h).
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
PARK LAMPS ON
This message displays to alert the driver when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on while the
ignition is off and the driver’s door is opened. See
Exterior Lamps on page 204 for more information.
A chime sounds continuously while this message
is displayed.
PASSENGER’S DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the front passenger’s
door is not closed properly. When this message
appears, make sure that the front passenger’s
door is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted
out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
265
PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the passenger’s side
rear door is not closed properly. When this
message appears, make sure that the passenger’s
side rear door is closed completely.
This message displays while the ignition is in
RUN. A chime sounds when the ignition is shifted
out of PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
266
PASSENGER SEATBELT IS NOT
FASTENED
This message reminds you to buckle the
passenger’s safety belt.
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is
buckled, the passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled
with the passenger airbag enabled, and the
vehicle is in motion. You should have the
passenger buckle their safety belt.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is unbuckled
and the passenger is still unbuckled and the
passenger airbag is enabled. If the passenger’s
safety belt is already buckled, this message
and chime will not come on.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFE
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. This happens when driving
conditions, such as climbing a steep hill, make the
transaxle overwork in a gear that may cause
damage to the vehicle’s engine or transaxle.
Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s
ability to accelerate.
This message displays when your vehicle is in
an overheated engine operating mode. This
operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to
a safe place in an emergency. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and
engine performance. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 453 for more
information. Anytime this message is on, the
vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service
as soon as possible.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the
DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to
clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the
DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to
clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
267
REMOTE START DISABLED
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays if a remote start attempt is
unsuccessful. This may be caused if any of the
following conditions are true when a remote
start attempt is made:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
• The key is in the ignition.
• The hood or the doors are not closed.
• There is an emission control system
•
•
•
•
•
268
malfunction.
The engine coolant temperature is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
The hazard warning flashers are turned on.
The maximum number of remote starts
or remote start attempts between ignition
cycles has been reached.
The content theft-deterrent alarm is on while
attempting to remote start the vehicle.
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Personalization (Uplevel Only) on page 275 and
“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless
Entry System Operation on page 121 for
more information.
REMOTE START ON
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message displays when a remote start is initiated.
See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote
Keyless Entry System Operation on page 121 for
more information.
RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the right front turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlamps
and Sidemarker Lamps on page 471.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This message displays when the right rear turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
on page 473.
This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
SERVICE ABS SYSTEM
This message displays when the vehicle’s
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) is not functioning
properly. Have the ABS serviced by your dealer as
soon as possible.
The ABS warning light also appears on the
instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light on page 239.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
269
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays along with the airbag
readiness light if there is a problem with the airbag
system. Have your dealer inspect the system for
problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 234 and Airbag System on page 96 for more
information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays when a problem with the
brake system has been detected. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon as
possible.
270
The brake system warning light also appears on
the instrument panel cluster when this message
appears on the DIC. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 238.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE PARK LAMPS
This message displays when there is a problem
with the park lamps. Check to see if the park lamp
fuse is blown and replace the fuse if necessary.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 527 and
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 528 for
more information. If changing the fuse does not
correct the problem, see your dealer.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
®
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak , this message
displays if there has been a problem detected with
StabiliTrak®. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 381.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull
off the road as soon as possible and stop
carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the
ignition off and then back on. If this message
still stays on or turns back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the
StabiliTrak® System inspected by your dealer as
soon as possible.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays when the system is
not functioning properly. A warning light also
appears on the instrument panel cluster. See
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on
page 240. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 379 for more information. Have the TCS
serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
271
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions
related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
272
STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
displays when StabiliTrak® is actively assisting you
with directional control of the vehicle. Slippery
road conditions may exist when this message is
displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 381.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
RUN. This message stays on until road conditions
change and StabiliTrak® is not active.
This message cannot be acknowledged and
cleared from the screen.
STABILITY CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
displays any time the system turns off. When this
message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is
no longer available to assist you with directional
control of the vehicle. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 381.
This message displays only while the ignition is
in RUN.
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® system to turn off:
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® system failure. See
your dealer for service.
STARTING DISABLED
This message displays if the starting of the engine
is disabled due to the electronic throttle control
system or vehicle theft-deterrent system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer
immediately.
This message only appears while the ignition is in
RUN and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays when the system is
on. Slippery road conditions may exist if this
message is displayed, so adjust your driving
accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 379 for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN and will not disappear until driving conditions
change and the TCS is no longer active.
This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared
from the screen.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message displays when the TCS turns
off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 379 for more information.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN and disappears after two seconds.
273
Any of the following conditions may cause the
TCS to turn off:
• The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction
control button located on the center of the
instrument panel. See Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 379.
• The battery is low.
• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer for
service.
TRANSMISSION FLUID HOT
This message displays when the transaxle fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and
allow it to idle until it cools down. If the warning
message continues to display, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer as soon as possible.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the
DIC buttons to acknowledge this message and to
clear it from the screen.
274
This message continues to display for two seconds
if it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the
condition still exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message re-appears
when the engine is turned on.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays as a reminder to turn off
the turn signal if you drive your vehicle for
more than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn
signal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on
page 195.
This message displays and a chime sounds only
when the ignition is in RUN. This message
clears from the DIC if the turn signal is manually
turned off, a turn is completed, or the message
is acknowledged.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only)
corresponds to driver 2. The driver number also
corresponds to the numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of
the remote keyless entry transmitters.
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to
one preferred setting. Customization features can
only be programmed to one setting on the
vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred
setting for two different drivers. The customization
features include the following:
• Exterior lighting delay
• Interior lighting delay
• Delayed locking
• Content theft
• Remote keyless entry feedback
• Remote start
• Rear park chime
The personalization features include the following:
• Radio station presets
• Auto door unlock preferences
• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences
Your vehicle may also have personalization
capabilities that allow you to program certain
features to a preferred setting for up to two drivers.
The first personalized key corresponds to
driver 1 and the second personalized key
All of the customization and personalization options
may not be available on your vehicle. Only the
options available will be displayed on your DIC.
The default settings for the customization and
personalization features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been
changed from their default setting since then.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
The driver’s personalization preferences are
recalled by using the key programmed for
driver 1 or 2. The driver number also corresponds
to the numbers, 1 or 2, on the back of the
remote keyless entry transmitters.
To change customization and personalization
preferences, use the following procedure.
275
Entering the Personal Program Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle
in PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
2. Press the menu button until PERSONAL
PROGRAM displays.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONAL
PROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.
If the vehicle is not able to enter the personal
program menu, PERSONAL PROGRAM
NOT AVAILABLE will display.
3. Press the set/reset button to begin.
4. The DIC will then display an instruction
screen.
Press the menu button to display the modes
that are available to program.
Press the set/reset button to change the
setting of each mode.
Customization Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow
you to program settings to the vehicle:
276
FACTORY DEFAULTS
This feature allows you to set all of the
customization and personalization features back to
their factory default settings.
Press the menu button until FACTORY
DEFAULTS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
NO (default): The customization and
personalization features will not be set to their
factory default settings.
YES: The customization and personalization
features will be set to their factory default settings.
If YES is selected, the keys will need to be
personalized again to be recognized as key 1 or 2.
See “PERSONALIZE KEY” later in this section
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
ALL KEYS RESET
This screen will only display if YES was selected
on the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.
Press the set/reset button to scroll through the
following choices:
CANCEL (default): The features will not be set to
their factory default settings and the DIC will
return to the FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.
OK: The features will be set to their factory default
settings, the DIC will exit the personal program
menu, and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED
will display.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY
This feature allows you to set the amount of time
the exterior lamps remain on after the key is
removed from the ignition or the vehicle is
unlocked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
Press the menu button until EXT LIGHT DELAY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
15 seconds.
30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps will
stay on for 30 seconds.
60 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
60 seconds.
90 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
90 seconds.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
277
INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED
This feature enables the interior lamps in
the vehicle to turn on for about 25 seconds after
the key is removed from the ignition.
Press the menu button until INT LIGHTS KEYS
REMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will not
cause the interior lamps to turn on.
ON (default): Removing the key from the ignition
will cause the interior lamps to be turned on for
about 25 seconds.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
When the delayed locking feature is enabled, it
may be activated when the key is out of the
ignition by doing one of the following:
• Pressing the driver’s door power lock switch
one time while the driver’s door is open.
• Pressing the passenger’s door power lock
switch one time while the passenger’s
door is open.
• Pressing the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter one time while any
door is open.
Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed
locking is active.
The doors may be locked immediately by repeating
one of the above actions more than one time.
DELAYED LOCKING
If a door remains open, without any other
door being opened or closed, the vehicle will lock
after approximately 45 seconds.
This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be
delayed until all of the doors have been closed
for approximately five seconds.
If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock
the doors. See Delayed Locking on page 130
for more information.
278
Press the menu button until DELAYED LOCKING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
Press the menu button until CONTENT THEFT
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of
the vehicle’s doors.
OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will be
turned off.
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors
will be delayed by five seconds while a door
is open after a power door lock switch is pressed,
or the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed while a door is open.
ON (default): The content theft-deterrent system
will be turned on.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
CONTENT THEFT
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent
system, once this feature is turned on, the system
will activate if someone tries to enter the vehicle
without using the remote keyless entry transmitter
or the correct key. It will also activate when an
incorrect key is used in the ignition.
When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent
system will be armed when the vehicle is locked by
pressing the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter or by pressing the power
door lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 146 and Power Door Locks on page 129
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
279
FOB LOCK FEEDBACK
REMOTE START
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press the menu button until FOB LOCK
FEEDBACK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows
the remote start to be turned OFF or ON. The
remote start feature allows you to start the engine
from outside of the vehicle using the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle
Start” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 121 for more information.
OFF: There will be no feedback when locking the
vehicle.
Press the menu button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter, and the horn will
sound when the lock button is pressed again
within five seconds of the previous command.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
280
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will
be enabled.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
REAR PARK CHIME
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, this feature allows
the URPA system’s chime to be turned OFF or
ON. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
on page 212 for more information.
Press the option button until REAR PARK CHIME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
Press the menu button until PERSONALIZE KEY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
OFF: The URPA system’s chime will be disabled.
NO (default): The key will not be personalized.
ON (default): The URPA system’s chime will
be enabled.
YES: The key will be personalized.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Personalization Menu Items
The following are personalization features that
allow you to program setting for up to two drivers:
PERSONALIZE KEY
If you are using a key that has already been
personalized to be recognized as key 1 or 2, this
screen will not display. This feature allows
you to personalize a key to be recognized as
key 1 or 2. A personalized key allows you
to program personalization features to a preferred
setting to correspond to key 1 or 2.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
REPLACE KEY
This screen displays only if YES was selected for
the PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2
have already been personalized, and the current
key being used is not key 1 or 2. This feature
allows you to program a key to be recognized as
key 1 or 2 in the event that the previously
programmed key needs to be replaced.
1: The key will be programmed to be recognized
as key 1.
2: The key will be programmed to be recognized
as key 2.
CANCEL (default): The key will not be
programmed.
281
RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZED
This screen displays only if YES was selected for
the PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This feature
allows you to set the radio station presets to be
recognized for the key, 1 or 2, that is being
used. Once this message displays, set the radio
station presets. If the presets are not set at
this time, the presets will not be recognized for
key 1 or 2, however, the vehicle radio station
presets will be maintained.
ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key
is taken out of the ignition.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
AUTO UNLOCK ON
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL was
selected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature.
This feature allows the selection of when the
vehicle’s doors will unlock.
This feature allows automatic door unlocking to be
turned off, used for the driver’s door only, or for
all of the doors.
Press the menu button until AUTO UNLOCK ON
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
Press the menu button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the key
is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: None of the doors will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken
out of the ignition.
DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key
is taken out of the ignition.
282
PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS
This feature allows the selection of which doors
will unlock on the first press of the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
See Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 121 for more information.
Press the menu button until FOB UNLOCK ON
1ST PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlock
on the first press of the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
After programming the last option, the message
KEY FOB NOW PERSONALIZED will appear
on the DIC display for a few seconds if you
personalized the key. Next, the message
PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will appear briefly
on the DIC display, then the display will return
to the PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.
Exiting the Personal Program Menu
The personal program menu will be exited when
any of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.
• The end of the personal program menu is
reached.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it. The DIC will then display PRESS
UNLOCK SWITCH ON KEY FOB. Press the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter and your setting will be saved for that
remote keyless entry transmitter.
283
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 372. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone, and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. Here are some ways in which you can
help avoid distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
284
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been added.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety
belts, parking brake, and other functions
of your vehicle operate through the
radio/entertainment system. If that equipment
is replaced or additional equipment is added
to your vehicle, the chimes may not work. Make
sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 426.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 152 for more information.
Setting the Time
Press the H or the M button to enter clock mode.
Press and hold H until the correct hour appears
on the display. Press and hold M until the correct
minute appears on the display.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press either the H or the M button to
enter the clock mode, then press the tune knob to
select between the 12 or 24 hour display format.
The clock mode will automatically time out with the
changed display format set as the current default
setting.
285
Radio with CD
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station may broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD
similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). RDS features are available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
286
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters appear on the display.
RDS stations may also provide the time of day,
a program type (PTY) for current programming,
and the name of the program being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Playing the Radio
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press this knob to
turn the system on and off. Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or to
decrease the volume.
4 (Information): For RDS, press this button to
change what appears on the display while
using RDS. The display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY (program type),
and the name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the information
button while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category
or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the
information button until you see the desired
display, then hold the button for two seconds. The
radio produces one beep and the selected
display becomes the default.
287
AUTO n (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive,
by increasing the volume as the vehicle speed
increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this
button to select AUTO VOLUME MIN (minimum),
AUTO VOLUME MED (medium), or AUTO
VOLUME MAX (maximum). Each higher setting
provides more volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds. To turn automatic volume
off, press this button until AUTO VOLUME OFF
appears on the display.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again to turn the sound on.
This button is not available on the Radio
with Six-Disc CD.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
display shows the selection.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio
stations.
288
t SEEK u: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears on
the display. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
arrow for four seconds until PRESET SCAN
appears on the display. The radio goes to the next
preset station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next preset station. Press either scan
arrow again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
e (Bass/Treble/Midrange): Press this knob to
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep.
Whenever that numbered pushbutton is
pressed, the station that was set returns and
the equalization that was selected is stored
for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
select BASS, MIDRANGE, or TREBLE. Turn
the knob to increase or to decrease. If a station is
weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the
middle position, press and hold this knob when the
tone control is on the display. The level changes
to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press and hold this knob when no
tone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIO
SETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
this button to select customized equalization
settings designed for country/western, jazz, talk,
pop, rock, and classical. Selecting CUSTOM
or changing bass or treble, returns the EQ to the
manual bass and treble settings.
The radio saves separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
289
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance
between the right and the left speakers, press this
knob until BALANCE appears on the display.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle
position, press and hold this knob when the
speaker control is on the display. The level
changes to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press and hold this knob when no
tone or speaker control is displayed. AUDIO
SETTINGS CENTERED appears on the display.
Finding a Category Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT (category) button. The last
selected category appears on the display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow to take you to a category’s
station. SEEKING CATEGORY appears on
the display.
4. To go to another station within that category,
press the CAT button to display the category,
then press either SEEK arrow to go to
another station.
If both category and traffic are on, the radio
searches for stations with the selected category
and traffic announcements. This function does not
work with XM™.
If the radio cannot find the desired category,
NONE appears on the display and the radio
returns to the last station you were listening to.
This function does not work with XM™.
290
SCAN: Scan the stations within a category by
performing the following:
1. Press the CAT button. The last selected
category appears on the display.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press
and hold either SCAN arrow until you hear a
beep and SCAN CATEGORY appears on
the display. The radio begins scanning
the stations in the category.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
If both category and TRAF (traffic) are on,
the radio scans for stations with the selected
category and traffic announcements.
BAND (AF – Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger
station with the same category. To turn alternate
frequency on, press and hold BAND for
four seconds. AF ON appears on the display.
The radio may switch to stations with a stronger
frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
BAND again for four seconds. AF OFF appears on
the display. The radio does not switch to other
stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
291
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national
emergencies. When an alert announcement comes
on the current radio station, ALERT! appears on the
display. You will hear the announcement, even if
the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
4 (INFO – Information): If the current station has
a message, INFO appears on the display. Press
this button to see the message. The message may
display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To
scroll through the message, press and release this
button. A new group of words appears on the
display after every press of the button. Once the
complete message has displayed, INFO
disappears from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
292
displayed by pressing this button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO appears on the display.
TRAF (TA – Traffic): If TA appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio seeks to a station that does. When a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements is found, the
radio stops seeking and TA appears on the display.
If no station is found that broadcasts traffic
announcements, NO TRAFFIC appears on the
display.
If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button to
turn off the traffic announcements.
The radio plays the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD
if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
Radio Messages
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
factory. If CAL ERR appears on the display, it
means that the radio has not been configured
properly for your vehicle and must be returned to
your dealer for service.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take
the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 307 later in this
section for further detail.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbol
appears on the display. As each new track
starts to play the track number appears on the
display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playback
performance) may be reduced due to the CD-R
quality, method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. For better playback
performance when home burning audio discs,
use brand named CD media showing the Compact
Disc™, and a burn rate no faster than 12X.
293
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in
finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of
the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs
on page 369 for more information.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next
or previous track.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse the current track.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RANDOM DISC appears on the display.
Press this button again to turn off random play.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time,
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,
you could damage the CD player. When
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
294
fast forward through the current track.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a
track over again. REPEAT appears on the display.
Press this button again to turn off repeat play.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again to turn the sound on.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. If either arrow is held
or pressed more than once, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the CD.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
safely inside the radio for future listening.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
the track number appears on the display.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. CD appears on the
display when a CD is in the player. If the system
has a remote playback device, pressing this button
a second time allows the remote device to play.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization is stored
whenever a CD is played. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playback
performance) may be reduced due to the CD-R
quality, method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. For better playback
performance when home burning audio discs,
use brand named CD media showing the Compact
Disc™, and a burn rate no faster than 12X.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD.
EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or
radio off.
295
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in
finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of
the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs
on page 369 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time,
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,
you could damage the CD player. When
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
296
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the load button.
3. When INSET CD # appears on the display,
load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the
slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds.
A beep will sound and LOAD ALL DISC
appears on the display.
3. When INSERT CD # appears on the display,
load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD #
to appear on the display, then load the next
CD. The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not
try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six,
complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading
CDs, press the load button to cancel the loading
function. The radio begins to play the last CD
loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number
for each CD appears on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number appears on the
display. To play a specific CD press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the eject button for
two seconds.
A beep will sound and EJECT ALL DISCS
appears on the display.
2. When REMOVE DISC appears on the display,
the CD ejects and can be removed.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the load or
the eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
CD automatically pulls back into the player. If CD
is pushed back into the player, before the
25 second time period is complete, the player
senses an error and tries to eject the CD several
times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually.
The player’s 25-second eject timer resets at each
press of eject, causing the player to not eject
the CD until the 25-second time period has
elapsed.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next
or previous track.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse within the current track.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
fast forward through the current track.
297
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on
one CD or all of the loaded CDs.
To turn off repeated play, press and release the
RPT button until REPEAT OFF appears on
the display.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening
to in random order, press and release this
button until RANDOM DISC PLAY appears on
the display.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are
loaded in random order, press and release
this button until RANDOM ALL DISCS appears
on the display.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the CD.
To turn off random play, press and release the
RDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on the
display.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track
or an entire CD over again.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release this
button until REPEAT appears on the display.
• To repeat an entire CD, press and release this
button until REPEAT ONE DISC appears on
the display.
298
t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio goes to the next track, plays for
10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press
either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CD
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of
the first track of each loaded CD. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s)
will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. CD appears on the
display when a CD is in the player. If your
system has a remote playback device, pressing
this button a second time allows the remote device
to play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization is stored
whenever a CD is played. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3
feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playing
an MP3 CD-R disc. For more information on
how to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3
on page 301 later in this section.
Using R (Song List) Mode (Single CD,
MP3, and Six-Disc CD)
This feature is capable of saving 20 track
selections. To save tracks into the song list
feature, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD.
2. Check to see that the CD player is not in
song list mode. S-LIST (sound list) should
not appear on the display. If S-LIST is present,
press the song list button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the
numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK
right arrow or turn the tune knob to locate
the track to be saved. The track begins
to play.
4. Press and hold the song list button to save
the track into memory. When song list is
pressed, one beep will sound. ADDED SONG
will appear on the display.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other
selections.
SONGLIST FULL appears on the display if you try
to save more than 20 selections.
299
To play the song list, press the song list button.
The recorded tracks begins to play in the
order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track returns
to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST appears on the display.
3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the tune
knob to select the desired track to be
deleted.
4. Press and hold the song list button for
two seconds. Release the button when
SONG REMOVED appears on the display.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining
tracks are moved up the list. When another track
is added to the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
300
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST appears on the display.
3. Press and hold the song list button for more
than four seconds. One beep will sound.
SONGLIST EMPTY appears on the display
indicating the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains
saved tracks from that CD, those tracks are
automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks
saved to the song list again are added to the
bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the song list button.
One beep will sound and S-LIST will be removed
from the display.
CD Messages
Using an MP3
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the
display and/or the CD comes out, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There may have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
MP3 CD-R Disc
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u or .wpl
extension, other file extensions may not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album will be available for display by the
radio when recorded using ID3 tags
version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
301
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning
Root Directory
an MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is
usually better to burn the disc all at once.
• Do not use CD-RW discs.
• Do not use colored discs.
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files, the
directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed
before root folders or files.
The player will be able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,
and 255 files. Long file names, folder names,
or playlist names may use more disc memory
space than necessary. To conserve space on the
disc, minimize the length of the file, folder, or
playlist names. You can also play an MP3 CD that
was recorded using no file folders. The system
can support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep
the depth of the folders to a minimum in order
to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,
and 255 files the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum cannot be accessed.
302
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder will not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files will be located under the root folder. The
next and previous folder functions will not function
on a CD that was recorded without folders or
playlists. When displaying the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are
located under the root folder. The folder down and
the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and
then go to the root folder. When the radio displays
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
Order of Play
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then
play begins from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root
directory have played, play continues from
files according to their numerical listing. After
playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first
folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default
display. See the information button later in
this section for more information. The new track
name appears on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio
displays the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four
pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
will not display.
303
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING appears
on the display. The CD should begin playing and
the CD symbol appears on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality (and playback
performance) may be reduced due to the CD-R
quality, method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. For better playback
performance when home burning audio discs,
use brand named CD media showing the Compact
Disc™, and a burn rate no faster than 12X.
There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in
finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of
the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs
on page 369 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
304
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert
more than one CD into the slot at a time,
or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,
you could damage the CD player. When
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next
or previous track.
{ (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to
the first track in the previous folder. Press and hold
this button to reverse through the current track.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential order, on
one CD, one folder, or all of the loaded CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening
to in random order, press and release this
button until RANDOM DISC appears on
the display.
• To play the tracks in the folder you are
listening to in random order, press and release
this button until RANDOM FOLDER appears
on the display.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are
loaded in random order, press and release
this button until RANDOM ALL appears on the
display.
To turn off random play, press and release the
RDM button until RANDOM OFF appears on the
display.
| (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the next folder. Press and hold
this button to fast forward the current track.
305
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track,
CD, or a folder over again.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current track, if more than 10 seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the CD.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release this
button until REPEAT TRACK appears on
the display.
• To repeat a CD, press and release this button
until REPEAT DISC appears on the display.
• To repeat a folder, press and release
this button until REPEAT FOLDER appears on
the display.
4 (Information): Press this button to display the
artist name and album contained in the ID3 tag.
To turn off repeated play, press and release the
RPT button until REPEAT OFF appears on
the display
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD symbol
appears on the display when a CD is loaded.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again to turn the sound on.
Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
This button is not available on the Radio
with Six-Disc CD.
306
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
safely inside the radio for future listening.
may be activated with either the ignition or
radio off.
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
307
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM
dealer.
308
Navigation/Radio System
Parental Control
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
rj (Parental Control): This button is located
behind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks.
Press this button while using RSA, or when a
DVD or CD is playing to blank the video screen
and to mute the audio. The power indicator
lights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on the
parental control will also disable all other button
operations from the remote control and the
DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this
button again to restore operation of the RSA,
DVD player, and remote control.
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(Option A, Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have this type of DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. If it has
this feature, it will include a DVD player, a video
display screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets of
wireless headphones (if included), and a remote
control.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and automatically resume play if
the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. If
no disc is in the player, the system will power up
in auxiliary mode.
309
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video
screen while driving and should not try to do so.
The RSE system will play DVD, CD, and MP3
discs. You can also connect an auxiliary device to
the RSE system to play games, watch videos,
look at pictures, etc.
Normal operation may be limited under extremely
low or high temperatures, in order to protect
the system from damage. Operate the RSE system
under normal or comfortable cabin temperature
ranges.
Headphones
Wireless Headphones
The RSE system may include two sets of wireless
headphones (batteries are included).
The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF
switch, a channel select switch, and a volume
control. To use the headphones, turn the switch to
ON. An indicator light on the headphones will
illuminate. If the light does not illuminate,
the batteries may need to be replaced.
310
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for
more information. Switch the headphones to
OFF when not in use.
The headphones will shut off automatically to save
the battery power if the RSE system is shut off
or if the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. The
transmitters are located next to the DVD faceplate.
If you move too far forward or step out of the
vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.
DVD and auxiliary audio will always be found
on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless
headphones. RSA audio is dedicated to CHB or
CH2 of the wireless headphones.
To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,
use the volume control.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
If there is a decreased audio signal during CD,
MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissing
noise through the speakers and/or headphones. If
the hissing sound in the wireless headphones
seems excessive, make sure that the headphone
batteries are fully charged. Some amount of
hissing is normal.
Both sets of rear seat headphones may include
foam ear pads that can be replaced.
Foam ear pads on these headphones may
become worn or damaged. The headphone foam
ear pads can become damaged if they are not
handled or stored properly. If the foam ear pads do
become damaged or worn out, the pads can be
replaced separately from the headphone set.
It is not necessary to replace the complete
headphone set.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment
door located on the left side of the headphone
earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Tighten the screw on the battery
compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries, and keep
them in a cool, dry place.
The headphone replacement foam ear pads can
be ordered in pairs. See your dealer for more
information.
311
Wired Headphones
Stereo RCA Jacks
There is a right and left wired headphone jack. To
adjust the volume, do the following:
1. Plug the headphone into the corresponding
jack, located behind the video screen, next
to the auxiliary jacks.
2. Press the corresponding headphone button on
the DVD faceplate.
3. Press the right and left arrow buttons, on the
DVD faceplate, to increase or to decrease the
volume.
The wired headphones work as follows:
• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphones will
play RSE audio.
• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphones will
play RSA audio.
• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphones will
play RSA audio.
312
The RCA jacks are located behind the video
screen on the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow
audio and video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE. The yellow RCA jack is
used for video inputs, the red RCA jack for right
audio inputs, and the white RCA jack for left audio
inputs. The system requires standard RCA
cables, not included, to connect the auxiliary
device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,
connect an external auxiliary device such as a
camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both the
auxiliary device power and the power on the
front of the RSE player.
If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned
on, the player will automatically begin playing
the disc and the user will need to press the AUX
button on the remote control or on the DVD
player faceplate to switch the system between the
DVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVD
Player” and “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices
can be heard through the following possible
sources:
• Vehicle Speakers
• Wireless Headphones
• Wired Headphones (not included)
Vehicle Speakers
Only one audio source can be heard through the
vehicle’s speakers at a time.
The RSE system or an auxiliary device can be
heard through all of the vehicle’s speakers when
the following occurs:
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing
• The front audio system is on and the CD AUX
button is pressed to enable the RSE system
DVD will appear on the radio display when the
RSE system is on.
To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press
the CD AUX button on the radio. The audio
from the RSE system can be heard through the
wireless headphones and the vehicles speakers at
the same time. The volume on the radio may
vary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD,
MP3, or an auxiliary device.
313
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead
console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push forward on the release button and the
screen will fold down.
2. Adjust its position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its stowed and latched position.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead
console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons
on the DVD player and/or by the buttons on
the remote control. See “Remote Control” later in
this section for more information.
314
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region code for
the country that the vehicle was sold. The DVD
region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, enhanced
CDs, video CDs, and CD-ROM with MP3
media are supported by this DVD player. DVD+R,
DVD+RW, and copy protected CDs may or
may not be supported by the DVD player. The
DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-R/W, and DVD audio
media. An error message will appear on the
display if this type of media is inserted into the
DVD player.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
DVD Player Buttons
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
device.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a disc. Press this button while a disc is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue play
of a disc.
tr / [ u (Previous and Fast Reverse/Next
and Fast Forward): These controls can be
used to move forward or backward through a disc.
cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release this
button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding.
Press this button twice to eject a disc. If the player
is already stopped, then only press this button
once.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on and off.
These buttons can also be used to modify RSA,
rear temperature, rear fan speed, and wired
headphone volume adjustment. See “Headphones”
earlier in this section, Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(Option A, Uplevel) on page 340 or Rear
Seat Audio (RSA) (Option B, Uplevel) on
page 343, and Rear Climate Control System
(Option A, Uplevel) on page 224 or Rear Climate
Control System (Option B, Uplevel) on page 226
for more information.
When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and the
RSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pause
buttons are the only buttons that will work.
315
Playing a Disc
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player
will continue loading the disc and the player will
automatically start if the vehicle is in
ACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP.
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the
remote control.
If a disc is already in the player, make sure that
the DVD player is on, then press the play/pause
button on the player faceplate or on the remote
control. You can also, press the CD AUX button on
the radio faceplate, until RSE appears on the
display, to start playing a disc.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or
skipping of the copyright information or previews.
Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews
have finished. If the DVD does not begin playing at
the main title, refer to the on-screen instructions.
316
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was
last stopped if the disc has not been ejected.
If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resume
play at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player
faceplate, when the disc is stopped, to eject the
disc. There is not an eject button on the
remote control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not
removed, the DVD player will reload the disc after
a short period of time.
Remote Control
Remote Control Buttons
The RSE system will include a remote control
(batteries are included). To use the remote control,
aim it at the transmitter window next to the RSE
faceplate and press the desired button. Direct
sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of
the transmitter to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not
seem to be working, the batteries may need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the line of sight will
affect the function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight may damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on and off.
P (Backlight): Press this button to turn the
remote control backlighting on. The backlight will
automatically turn off after eight seconds.
v (Title): Press this button to display the current
title number. Each press of this button will
move the disc to the next available title.
317
n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press these
buttons to move through DVD menus.
The up and down arrows will move through MP3
folders.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choice that is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Control Button): Press this button
to open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menus
to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and
display modes.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the
main DVD menu. The menu is different on every
disc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the menu. After
making a selection, press the enter button.
q (Return): Press this button to go back one
step in the RSE OSD menu and some DVD
menus. Press this button to exit the current menu
and to move to the previous menu.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc.
318
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a disc. Press this button while a disc is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the disc.
t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
Press this button again to return to the previous
chapter or track. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or previews.
u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
to the beginning of the next chapter or track.
This button may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, press
the play or stop button. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding,
press the play or stop button. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
e (Sound): Press this button to display the
\ (Clear): Press this button within two seconds
current audio track. Each press will move the DVD
to the next language or commentary. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
after inputting a numeric selection, to clear all
numeric inputs.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display the
current subtitles. Each press of this button
will move the DVD to the next available subtitle
option (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).
The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
source.
d (Camera): Press this button to display the
current camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature. Each press will move the DVD to the
next available camera angle. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or
track number selection.
} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this button
to select chapter or track numbers greater
than 9. Press this button before inputting the
number.
RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) Menu
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD or
an auxiliary device, do the following:
To access this menu, press the display button on
the remote control. Once the menu is on the
screen, use the directional arrows and the enter
button to navigate the screen. This menu will
let you select default preferences for video format,
language preference, brightness, color, contrast,
and tint. Not all DVDs support all the feature
defaults in the setup menus. If a feature is not
supported, the defaults will be provided by
the DVD media. To exit this menu, press the
display or the return button on the remote control
or wait for the menu to time out.
The default language selection will apply to all
future DVDs.
319
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD or
an MP3, do the following:
Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in the
RSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary,
then press the display button on the remote control.
Once the menu is on the screen, use the directional
arrows and the enter button to navigate the screen.
This menu will let you select default preferences for
language and playback settings. To exit this menu,
press the display or the return button on the remote
control or wait for the menu to time out.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
No power.
Disc will not play.
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the
following:
1. Slide the battery door, located on the back of
the remote control, down.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3. Close the battery door.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
320
No sound — Wireless
Headphones
No sound — Wired
Headphones
Recommended Action
The ignition may not be
in ACCESSORY, RUN,
or RAP.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. The power
indicator lights will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the AUX button to
switch between the DVD
player and the auxiliary
source. The disc is upside
down or is not compatible.
Turn the headphones on.
Make sure the correct
channel is selected on the
wireless headphones.
Check the batteries. The
volume on the
headphones could be too
low, adjust the volume.
Make sure the wired
headphones are plugged
in. Adjust the volume. If
RSA is on, DVD audio will
not be heard.
Problem
No sound — Vehicle
Speakers
The picture is distorted
during fast forward or
reverse.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
stretched out.
I ejected the disc and
tried to take it out, but it
was pulled back into
the slot.
Recommended Action
If the DVD system is
being heard through the
vehicle speakers, adjust
the volume on the radio.
Press the CD AUX button
on the radio to make sure
that RSE is enabled. The
rear speakers will mute
when RSA is on.
This is normal for this
operation.
Video mode may not be
correctly set. See “RSE
OSD” earlier in this
section.
Press the eject
button once.
Problem
Recommended Action
The language in the audio Press the main menu
or on the screen is wrong. button on the remote
control and change the
audio or language
selection on the DVD
menu. To change the
language preference,
press the display button to
access the RSE OSD
menu. See “RSE OSD”
earlier in this section.
The remote control does
Point the remote control
not work.
directly at the face of the
DVD unit. The batteries
could be weak or put in
wrong. The parental
control button might have
been pressed, the power
indicator lights will flash.
How do I get subtitles on Press the subtitle button
or off?
on the remote control to
select subtitle option or go
to the DVDs main menu
and follow the screen
prompts.
321
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
The audio or video skips
or jumps.
The fast forward, fast
reverse, previous, and
next functions do
not work.
322
Recommended Action
Press and release the
AUX button on the remote
control or the DVD player
to get to auxiliary input.
Check to make sure that
the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
The DVD could be dirty or
scratched. Try cleaning
the disc.
Some commands that do
one thing for DVDs will
not always work or
perform the same function
for audio, audio discs, or
games. These functions
may also be disabled
when the DVD is playing
the copyright information
or the previews. When
RSA is on, these buttons
control RSA functions.
Problem
My disc is stuck in the
player. The eject button
does not work.
Recommended Action
Press the eject button on
the DVD player. Turn the
ignition off, then on again,
then press the eject
button on the DVD player.
Do not attempt to force or
remove the disc from the
player. If the problem
persists, return to your
GM dealer for further
assistance.
I lost the remote control
Contact your GM dealer
and/or the headphones.
for assistance.
This could be caused by
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out interference from cell
towers or by using the
or buzzes for a moment,
cellular telephone or other
then it comes back.
radio transmitter devices
in the vehicle.
Problem
DVD System inoperable.
The wireless headphones
have audio distortion.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Recommended Action
In severe or extreme
temperatures the DVD
system might not be
operable. Temperatures
below −4°F (−20°C) or
above 140°F (60°C) could
damage the DVD system.
Operate the DVD system
under normal or
comfortable cabin
temperature ranges. See
your GM dealer if the
problem persists.
Verify that the
headphones are facing to
the front of the vehicle,
left and right sides are
indicated on the
headphones to ensure
that the signal is received
properly.
Verify that there is no
obstruction between the
headphone(s) and the
transmitter.
Verify that the batteries
have a full charge.
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the
video screen.
Disc Format Error: This message will be
displayed if a disc is inserted upside down, if the
disc is not readable, or if the disc format is
not compatible.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed
if the mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched
or damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be
displayed if the region code of the DVD is not
compatible with the region code of the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be
displayed if the disc is not properly loaded or
ejected.
No Disc: This message will be displayed when
you try to play or eject a disc that is not in
the player.
X: A white X will be displayed, in the upper left
corner of the video screen, if the operation that has
been selected is not currently available.
323
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with video distortion
when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB
radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way
radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and
buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as
damage may result.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(Option B, Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have this type of DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. If it has
this feature, it will include a DVD player, a video
display screen, auxiliary inputs, two sets of
wireless headphones, and a remote control.
Parental Control
rj (Parental Control): This button is located
behind the video screen, next to the auxiliary jacks.
Press this button while using rear seat audio (RSA),
or when a DVD or CD is playing to make the video
screen go blank and to mute the audio. The power
indicator lights on the DVD player will flash. Turning
on the parental control will also disable all other
button operations from the remote control and the
DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this
button again to restore operation of the RSA, DVD
player, and remote control.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and to automatically resume play
of a disc that is in the player while the vehicle is on.
If no disc is in the player, the system will power up
and display no display on the LCD screen.
324
Before You Drive
Wireless Headphones
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video
screen while driving and should not try to do so.
The RSE system can play DVD, CD, and MP3
discs. You can also connect an auxiliary device to
the RSE system to play games, watch videos,
look at pictures, etc.
The RSE system may include two sets of wireless
headphones (batteries may be included with
the headphone sets).
Normal operation may be limited under extremely
low or high temperatures, in order to protect
the system from damage. Operate the RSE system
under normal or comfortable cabin temperature
ranges.
Headphones
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF
switch, a channel select switch, and a volume
control. To use the headphones, turn the ON/OFF
switch to ON. An indicator light on the headphones
will come on. If the light does not come on, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Switch the headphones to OFF when
not in use.
The headphones will shut off automatically to save
the battery power if the RSE system is off or if
the headphones are out of range of the
transmitters for more than three minutes. The
transmitters are located next to the DVD faceplate.
If you move too far forward or step out of the
vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio signal.
DVD and auxiliary audio will always be found
on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless
headphones. RSA audio is dedicated to CHB or
CH2 of the wireless headphones.
325
To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones,
use the volume control located on the
headphones.
If there is a decreased audio signal during CD,
MP3, or DVD play, there may be a low hissing
noise through the speakers and/or headphones. If
the hissing sound in the wireless headphones
seems excessive, make sure that the headphone
batteries are fully charged. Some amount of
hissing is normal.
Both sets of rear seat headphones may include
foam ear pads that can be replaced.
Foam ear pads on these headphones may
become worn or damaged. The headphone foam
ear pads can become damaged if they are not
handled or stored properly. If the foam ear pads do
become damaged or worn out, the pads can be
replaced separately from the headphone set.
It is not necessary to replace the complete
headphone set.
The headphone replacement foam ear pads can
be ordered in pairs. See your dealer for more
information.
326
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment
door located on the left side of the headphone
earpiece.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw on the battery
compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries, and keep
them in a cool, dry place.
Wired Headphones
There is a right and left wired headphone jack. To
adjust the volume, do the following:
1. Plug the headphone into the corresponding
jack, located behind the video screen, next
to the auxiliary jacks.
2. Press the headphone volume control button
until the Wired Headset Volume is displayed
and the Left wired headphone is highlighted
for selection. Press the volume control button
again to select the Right volume control.
Another way to select either the Left or Right
Wired Headset Volume is to press the up
or down arrows on the DVD faceplate.
3. Press the right and left arrow buttons on the
DVD faceplate to increase or to decrease the
volume. Press the headphone volume
control button again or wait for a few seconds
until the screen disappears.
The wired headphones work as follows:
• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphones will
play RSE audio.
• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphones will
play RSA audio.
• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphones will
play RSA audio.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video
screen on the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow
audio and video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE. The yellow RCA jack is
used for video input, the red RCA jack for
right audio inputs, and the white RCA jack for left
audio inputs. The system requires standard
RCA cables, not included, to connect the auxiliary
device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
327
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs,
connect an external auxiliary device such as a
camcorder to the RCA jacks and turn on both the
auxiliary device power and the power on the
front of the RSE player.
If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned
on, the player may automatically begin playing
the disc. Press the AUX button on the remote
control or the DVD AUX button on the DVD player
faceplate to switch the system between the
DVD player and the auxiliary device. See “DVD
Player” and “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices
can be heard through the following sources:
• Vehicle Speakers
• Wireless Headphones
• Wired Headphones (not included)
328
Vehicle Speakers
Only one audio source can be heard through the
vehicle’s speakers at a time.
The RSE system or an auxiliary device can be
heard through all of the vehicle’s speakers when
the following occurs:
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing
• The front audio system is on and the CD AUX
button is pressed to enable the RSE system
DVD appears on the radio display when the RSE
system is on.
To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press
the CD AUX button on the radio. The audio
from the RSE system can be heard through the
wireless headphones and the vehicles speakers at
the same time. The volume on the radio may
vary when switching between the radio, CD, DVD,
MP3, or an auxiliary device.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead
console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button and the screen will
fold down.
2. Adjust its position as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its stowed and latched position.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible
with DVDs of the appropriate region code for
the country that the vehicle was sold. The DVD
region code is printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The player is capable of playing the following
media formats: DVD (single and dual player),
DVD+R/RW, DVD-R/RW, DVD-ROM with MP3,
DVD-ROM with WMA, CD-DA, CD-R/RW,
CD-ROM with MP3, CD-ROM with WMA,
Enhanced CD, SACD (CD player only). An error
message may appear on the display if any
other type of media is inserted into the DVD
player.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead
console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons
on the DVD player and/or by the buttons on
the remote control. See “Remote Control” later in
this section for more information.
329
DVD Player Buttons
43 (Wired Headphone Volume): Press this
button to select the correct headphone. Then press
the left or right arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the headphone volume.
When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and the
RSA system is on, the stop/eject and play/pause
buttons are the only buttons that will work.
RSE Faceplate with Rear Seat Climate Controls
shown, RSE Faceplate without Rear Seat Climate
Controls similar
cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release this
button to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding.
Press this button twice to eject a disc. If the player
is already stopped, then only press this button
once.
DVD AUX (Disc Auxiliary): Press this button to
switch the system between the DVD player and an
auxiliary device.
rj (Play/Pause): Press the play button to start
play of a disc. Press the pause button while a
disc is playing to pause it. Press it again to
continue play of a disc.
330
RSA SRC (Rear Seat Audio Source): Press this
button to switch between playing the AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1™ or XM2™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), or the front CD player. If one of the
sources are not loaded, the system will skip
over the source when this button is pressed.
q, Q, r, R (Directional Arrows): Press these
buttons to move through DVD menus.
The up and down arrows will move through MP3
folders.
g (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, press
the play or stop button. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
l (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
Playing a Disc
forward the DVD and CD. To stop forwarding,
press the play or stop button. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player
will continue loading the disc and the player will
automatically start if the vehicle is in
ACCESSORY, RUN, or RAP.
MENU (Disc): Press this button to view the main
DVD menu. The menu is different on every
disc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the menu. After
making a selection, press the enter button.
r (Enter/Select): Press this button to select
the choice that is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Control Button): For vehicles
without rear seat climate control, this button will
take the place of the fan/temp button. For vehicles
with rear seat climate control, this button is also
found on the remote control. Press this button
to open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menus
to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and
display modes.
If a disc is already in the player, make sure that
the DVD player is on, then press the play/pause
button on the player faceplate or on the remote
control. You can also press the DVD AUX button
on the player faceplate, or the CD AUX button
on the radio faceplate until RSE appears on
the display, to start playing a disc.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or
skipping of the copyright information or previews.
Some DVDs will begin playing after the previews
have finished. If the DVD does not begin playing at
the main title, refer to the on-screen instructions.
331
Stopping and Resuming Playback
Remote Control
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the
remote control.
The RSE system includes a remote control
(batteries may be included with the remote
control). To use the remote control, aim it at the
transmitter window next to the RSE faceplate and
press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very
bright light may affect the ability of the transmitter
to receive signals from the remote control. If
the remote control does not seem to be working,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this section. Objects
blocking the line of sight will affect the function
of the remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control. The movie should resume play from where
it was last stopped if the disc has not been
ejected.
If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resume
play at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the DVD player
faceplate, when the disc is stopped, to eject the
disc. There is no eject button on the remote
control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not
removed, the DVD player will reload the disc after
a short period of time.
332
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight may damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
Remote Control Buttons
q, Q, r, R (Directional Arrows): Press these
buttons to move through DVD menus.
The up and down arrows will move through MP3
folders.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choice that is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Control Button): Press this button
to open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menus
to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and
display modes.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD
player on and off.
P (Backlight): Press this button to turn the
remote control backlighting on. The backlight will
automatically turn off after eight seconds.
v (Title): Press this button to display the current
title number. Each press of this button will
move the disc to the next available title.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the
main DVD menu. The menu is different on every
disc. Use the up, down, right, and left arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the menu. After
making a selection, press the enter button.
q (Return): Press this button to go back one
step in the RSE OSD menu and some DVD
menus. Press this button to exit the current menu
and to move to the previous menu.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a disc.
333
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play
of a disc. Press this button while a disc is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the disc.
e (Sound): Press this button to display the
t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display the
to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
Press this button again to return to the previous
chapter or track. This button may not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or previews.
current subtitles. Each press of this button
will move the DVD to the next available subtitle
option (English, Spanish, French, etc., if available).
The format and content of this function will vary
for each disc.
u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to go
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
source.
to the beginning of the next chapter or track.
This button may not work when the DVD is playing
the copyright information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, press
the play or stop button. This button may not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding,
press the play or stop button. This button may
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
334
current audio track. Each press will move the DVD
to the next language or commentary. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
d (Camera): Press this button to display the
current camera angle on DVDs that have
this feature. Each press will move the DVD to the
next available camera angle. The format and
content of this function will vary for each disc.
0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or
track number selection.
\ (Clear): Press this button within two seconds
after entering a numeric selection, to clear all
numeric inputs.
} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this button
to select chapter or track numbers greater
than 9. Press this button before entering the
number.
RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) Menu
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD or
an auxiliary device, do the following:
To access this menu, press the display button on
the remote control or on the DVD faceplate, if
you do not have rear seat climate control. Once
the menu is on the screen, use the directional
arrows and the enter button to navigate the screen.
This menu will let you select default preferences
for video format, language preference, brightness,
color, contrast, and tint. Not all DVDs support
all the feature defaults in the setup menus.
If a feature is not supported, the defaults will be
provided by the DVD media. To exit this menu,
press the display button, or the return button
on the remote control, or faceplate if there is no
rear seat climate control, or wait for the menu
to time out.
The default language selection will apply to all
future DVDs.
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD or
an MP3, do the following:
Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in the
RSE system and that the system is not in auxiliary,
then press the display button on the remote
control, or faceplate if there is no rear seat climate
control. Once the menu is on the screen, use
the directional arrows and the enter button
to navigate the screen. This menu lets you select
default preferences for language and playback
settings. To exit this menu, press the display
button, or the return button on the remote control,
or faceplate if there is no rear seat climate
control, or wait for the menu to time out.
335
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the
following:
1. Slide the battery door, located on the back of
the remote control, down.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
No power.
Disc will not play.
3. Close the battery door.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
No sound — Wireless
Headphones
336
Recommended Action
The ignition may not be
in ACCESSORY, RUN,
or RAP.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. The power
indicator lights will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the DVD AUX
button on the player
faceplate or the AUX
button on the remote to
switch between the DVD
player and the auxiliary
sources. The disc is
upside down or is not
compatible.
Turn the headphones on.
Make sure the correct
channel is selected on the
wireless headphones.
Check the batteries. The
volume on the
headphones could be too
low, adjust the volume.
Problem
No sound — Wired
Headphones
No sound — Vehicle
Speakers
The picture is distorted
during fast forward or
reverse.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
stretched out.
I ejected the disc and
tried to take it out, but it
was pulled back into
the slot.
Recommended Action
Make sure the wired
headphones are plugged
in. Adjust the volume. If
RSA is on, DVD audio will
not be heard.
If the DVD system is
being heard through the
vehicle speakers, adjust
the volume on the radio.
Press the CD AUX button
on the radio to make sure
that RSE is enabled. The
rear speakers will mute
when RSA is on.
This is normal for this
operation.
Video mode may not be
correctly set. See “RSE
OSD” earlier in this
section.
Press the eject
button once.
Problem
Recommended Action
The language in the audio Press the main menu
or on the screen is wrong. button on the remote
control and change the
audio or language
selection on the DVD
menu. To change the
language preference,
press the display button to
access the RSE OSD
menu. See “RSE OSD”
earlier in this section.
The remote control does
Point the remote control
not work.
directly at the face of the
DVD unit. The batteries
could be weak or put in
wrong. The parental
control button might have
been pressed, the power
indicator lights will flash.
How do I get subtitles on Press the subtitle button
or off?
on the remote control to
select subtitle option or go
to the DVDs main menu
and follow the screen
prompts.
337
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
The audio or video skips
or jumps.
The fast forward, fast
reverse, previous, and
next functions do
not work.
338
Recommended Action
Press and release the
AUX button on the remote
control or the DVD AUX
button on the player
faceplate to get to
auxiliary input. Check to
make sure that the
auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
The DVD could be dirty or
scratched. Try cleaning
the disc.
Some commands that do
one thing for DVDs will
not always work or
perform the same function
for audio, audio discs, or
games. These functions
may also be disabled
when the DVD is playing
the copyright information
or the previews. When
RSA is on, these buttons
may control RSA
functions.
Problem
My disc is stuck in the
player. The eject button
does not work.
Recommended Action
Press the eject button on
the DVD player. Turn the
ignition off, then on again,
then press the eject
button on the DVD player.
Do not attempt to force or
remove the disc from the
player. If the problem
persists, return to your
dealer for further
assistance.
I lost the remote control
Contact your dealer for
and/or the headphones.
assistance.
This could be caused by
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts out interference from cell
towers or by using the
or buzzes for a moment,
cellular telephone or other
then it comes back.
radio transmitter devices
in the vehicle.
Problem
DVD System inoperable.
The wireless headphones
have audio distortion.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Recommended Action
In severe or extreme
temperatures the DVD
system might not be
operable. Temperatures
below −4°F (−20°C) or
above 140°F (60°C) could
damage the DVD system.
Operate the DVD system
under normal or
comfortable cabin
temperature ranges. See
your dealer if the problem
persists.
Verify that the
headphones are facing to
the front of the vehicle,
left and right sides are
indicated on the
headphones to ensure
that the signal is received
properly.
Verify that there is no
obstruction between the
headphone(s) and the
transmitter.
Verify that the batteries
have a full charge.
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the
video screen.
Disc Format Error: This message is displayed if
a disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is
not readable, or if the disc format is not
compatible.
Disc Play Error: This message is displayed if the
mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message is displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible
with the region code of the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message is displayed if
the disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
No Disc: This message is displayed when you try
to play or eject a disc that is not in the player.
X: A white X is displayed, in the upper left corner
of the video screen, if the operation that has
been selected is not currently available.
339
DVD Distortion
There may be an experience with video distortion
when operating cellular phones, scanners, CB
radios, Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way
radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the DVD Player
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and
buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened
with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as
damage may result.
340
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (Option A,
Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have this type of rear seat audio
(RSA) system, if it has this feature, it will allow
rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of
the following audio sources: AM/FM tuner, front
CD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped). However, the rear seat passengers
can only control the sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear
seat passengers may listen to a CD in the front
radio and control it while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority
over the RSA controls. If the front seat
passengers switch the source for the main radio to
a remote source, the RSA will not be able to
control the remote source. You can operate the
RSA when the main radio is off.
The DVD or auxiliary device will always be
available on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless
headphones. All other RSA sources are available
on CHB or CH2 of the wireless headphones,
as well as the wired headphones. If the RSA is
off, the wired headphones will provide DVD
or auxiliary device audio. The rear seat
passengers will not be able to listen to XM, on
CHB or CH2, if the front passenger is listening to
a DVD or auxiliary device.
The remote control will not operate any of the
RSA features.
RSA O (Power): Press this button to turn the
RSA system on or off. RSA CHB or RSA CH2 will
appear on the display when the system is on to
indicate the channel to receive audio for the
wireless headphones. Pressing this button will also
silence the rear speakers.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
selected radio station will appear on the display. If
the front passengers are listening to the radio,
the RSA will not switch between the bands
and cannot change the station.
341
tr / [ u (Tune): When listening to the
radio, press the right or the left arrow to go to the
next or the previous station and stay there.
This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between playing the AM/FM tuner, front CD player,
and XM™ Satellite Radio Service (if equipped). If
one of the sources are not loaded, the system will
skip over the source when this button is pressed.
When a CD is playing, press the left arrow to go
to the start of the current track or to the previous
track. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track on the CD. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
X (Headphone): Press the right or the left
headphone button to enable volume control of the
wired headphone connected to the corresponding
jack. Press the right and left arrow buttons to
change the volume.
PROG (Program): Press this button to select the
next preset station stored on the radio. Each
press of this button will take you to the next preset
station. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
When a CD is playing in the single CD player,
press this button to select the next track.
This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,
press this button to select the next CD, if
multiple CDs are loaded. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
342
rj (Parental Control): This button is located
behind the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks.
Press this button while using RSA, or when a
DVD or CD is playing to blank the video screen
and to mute the audio. The power indicator
lights on the DVD player will flash. Turning on the
parental control will also disable all other button
operations from the remote control and the
DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this
button again to restore operation of the RSA,
DVD player, and remote control.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and automatically resume play if
the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. If
no disc is in the player then the system will power
up in auxiliary mode.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (Option B,
Uplevel)
Your vehicle may have this type of rear seat audio
(RSA) system, if it has this feature, it will allow
rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of
the following audio sources: AM/FM tuner, front
CD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped). However, the rear seat passengers
can only control the sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear
seat passengers may listen to a CD in the front
radio and control it while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority
over the RSA controls. If the front seat
passengers switch the source for the main radio to
a remote source, the RSA will not be able to
control the remote source. You can operate the
RSA when the main radio is off.
The DVD or auxiliary device will always be
available on channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless
headphones. All other RSA sources are available
on channel (CHB or CH2) of the wireless
headphones, as well as the wired headphones. If
the RSA is off, the wired headphones will
provide DVD or auxiliary device audio. The rear
seat passengers will not be able to listen to XM, on
channel (CHB or CH2), if the front passenger is
listening to a DVD or auxiliary device.
The remote control will not operate any of the
RSA features.
RSA SRC (Rear Seat Audio Source): Press this
button to turn on the RSA system. Press this
button to switch between playing the AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1™ or XM2™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), or the front CD player. If one of the
sources is not loaded, the system will skip
over the source when this button is pressed. Hold
this button down to turn off RSA.
343
Q, R, q, r, (Directional Arrows):
Up Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FM
tuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to switch
between the station presets. Press this button
while sourcing the single CD player to go to the
next track. Press this button while sourcing
the six-disc CD player to go to the next disc.
43 (Wired Headphone Volume): Press this
button to select the correct headphone. Then press
the left or right arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the headphone volume.
Left Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FM
tuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to
seek down. Press this button while sourcing the
single CD player, or the six-disc CD player to go to
the previous track.
rj (Parental Control): This button is located
behind the video screen next to the auxiliary
and headphone jacks. Press this button while
using RSA, or when a DVD or CD is playing
to blank the video screen and to mute the audio.
The power indicator lights on the DVD player
will flash. Turning on the parental control will also
disable all other button operations from the
remote control and the DVD player, except for the
eject button. Press this button again to restore
operation of the RSA, DVD player, and remote
control.
Right Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FM
tuner, or XM™ Satellite Radio Service to seek
up. Press this button while sourcing the single CD
player, or the six-disc CD player to go to the
next track.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD
player power on and automatically resume play if
the vehicle is on and a disc is in the player. If
no disc is in the player then the system will power
up in auxiliary mode.
Down Arrow – Press this button while in AM/FM
tuner to change the BAND from AM/FM tuner
to the front CD player or to the XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
344
Mobile Digital Media System
Your vehicle may have the GM Mobile Digital
Media system which is made up of a digital media
player, a wireless game controller, the digital
media storage (DMS) cartridge, the USB 2.0 cradle
(docking station), and the PhatNoise™ Media
Manager software.
See the following information to learn more about
the components that make up the complete
Digital Media system.
Digital Media Player
The digital media player
is contained in an
overhead console. It is
attached to the
vehicle’s overhead rail
system, located
behind the second row
domelamp.
The overhead console has an opening that opens
downward and is used to insert or remove the
DMS cartridge. Pull the panel down to insert the
removable cartridge. Close this panel to completely
hide the cartridge inside the console.
With the DMS cartridge inserted, the digital media
player is capable of playing back all of the content
that has been stored on the cartridge. Audio content
is accessible through the radio and steering wheel
controls. Audio, videos, and games are accessible
through the rear seat video screen.
345
Wireless Game Controller
DMS (Digital Media Storage) Cartridge
Most of the functions on
the game controller will
vary, depending on
the game being played.
The DMS cartridge is a
palm-sized 40GB
portable hard drive.
The wireless game controller will allow the rear
seat passengers to interact with the video games
being played. While playing a game, press the
buttons on the controller to send commands to the
game being played.
This type of cartridge should allow for storage of up
to 5,000 songs in MP3 format, or up to 15 typical
movies in MPEG format, and hours of game
collections, or any combination of the three.
346
USB 2.0 Cradle
PhatNoise™ Media Manager
This type of cradle is
the docking station for
the DMS cartridge.
The USB 2.0 cradle is the docking station that
connects the DMS cartridge to the home computer
allowing new content to be added to the DMS
cartridge. When the cradle is connected to the
home computer, you can read from and write to the
DMS cartridge. The system is compatible with
home computers that support USB communication
(Microsoft® Windows 98 SR2 and higher).
The USB 2.0 cradle is also backward compatible
for computers equipped with USB 1.1.
The PhatNoise™ Media Manager (PMM) supports
the in-vehicle GM Mobile Digital Media system.
The PMM can be used to save audio CDs to the
DMS cartridge as well as organize and transfer
existing tracks on your PC, load video files
onto your DMS cartridge, purchase the preloaded
videos and games, and much more.
347
Selecting Your Mobile Digital Media as the
Active Source
Your radio and rear seat entertainment system
communicate with the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, as one compact unit that can be
accessed by everyone seated inside the vehicle.
The GM Mobile Digital Media system can hold
thousands of songs, hours of videos, and
hundreds of games.
To help use this system, see the following “Quick
Start” information:
• Front seat driver and passenger, use the radio
and steering wheel controls to access the
music collection with PhatNoise Voice Index™
technology. The preset buttons can be used
to select the browsing category. The Next,
Previous, and Seek buttons can be used to
browse within a browsing category. Browse the
music collection by artist, album, genre, or
custom playlist as the system uses the voice
mode to announce these selections. See
“Using the GM Mobile Digital Media System
for Front Seat Audio Entertainment” later
in this manual.
348
• Rear seat passengers, use the wireless DVD
remote control to navigate the menu displayed
on the overhead DVD video screen, then select
to play music, videos, or games. A dedicated
game controller is included with the Mobile
Digital Media package. See “Using the GM
Mobile Digital Media System for Rear Seat
Entertainment” later in this manual.
Your vehicle may have audio steering wheel
controls. Some audio controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel. See Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 367 in your owner manual.
If your vehicle has the OnStar®/Mute audio
steering wheel control, read the following
instructions.
For vehicles with OnStar®:
• Press and hold the mute button to activate
OnStar®.
• Press and release this button once again to
deactivate OnStar® mode and go to mute
mode.
• Press this button twice to return to sound from
the GM Mobile Digital Media system.
Using GM Mobile Digital Media System
for Front Seat Audio Entertainment
For vehicles without OnStar®:
• Press the mute button to silence the system,
press and release this button once again to
turn the sound back on.
A. Album
B. Artist
C. Genre
D. Playlist
E. Mode Items
F. Tracks
349
The GM Mobile Digital Media is controlled through
the radio and steering wheel controls on your
vehicle’s audio system. This system functions
differently than a typical CD changer. The Digital
Media system allows you to switch between
different playback modes. These modes determine
the next song that will play. Using modes, you
can browse through playlists, artists, albums, and
genres while the system reads Voice Index™
names to you while you drive. By selecting Playlist
Mode, you can access the music collection in
the order placed onto the DMS cartridge, or you
can have the system sort the music by Album,
Artist, or Genre by selecting the corresponding
Modes.
Starting the System for Front Seat
Entertainment
The GM Mobile Digital Media system is available
through the DMS mode of your radio. This
system will power on and off automatically and
resume where the system last stopped.
350
To begin playback, follow the instructions listed
below:
1. Insert the DMS cartridge into the GM Mobile
Digital Media player.
2. Turn on your radio and switch to the DMS
mode by pressing the CD/AUX button on
your radio.
3. Press any of the first four pushbuttons (A-D)
to select different browse modes.
4. Press the left or right SEEK/SCAN arrow (E)
to navigate through the mode items.
5. Turn the tune knob (F) to navigate through
songs in a song list.
Modes Overview
The numbered preset buttons one through four
are used to change the order tracks are grouped
and played. For example, in artist mode, all
tracks are grouped by artist names. Artist names
are listed alphabetically.
The SEEK/SCAN arrows are used to change the
mode item. For example, in Album Mode this will
change to the next or previous album. The mode list
name will display for five seconds, time-out, then
update to show which list the GM Mobile Digital
Media system is currently playing.
The tune knob is used to change the song within
the current category. For example, while in a
playlist (Playlist Mode) turning the tune knob to
the right will change from track 1 to track 2.
t SEEK/SCAN u: Once a mode has been set,
navigate through the categories within that mode by
pressing the right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow. The
category items will display for five seconds,
time-out, then update to show which category the
Digital Media system is currently playing.
To change the song that is currently playing, press
the right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow to navigate
through the songs.
Setting the Browse Mode Using Voice
Index™
The system automatically organizes all of the
songs on the DMS (digital media storage) cartridge
for you. With Voice Index™ browsing, the six
numbered pushbuttons are used as mode buttons
to browse as the system reads album, artist,
genre and playlist names to you while you drive.
1-6 (Pushbuttons): The GM Digital Media system
uses the numbered station preset buttons to
switch through the browse modes. Press one of
the pushbuttons to set the browse mode. The
selected browse mode will be announced and the
browse mode name will appear on the display.
The preset pushbuttons and the modes associated
with those numbers are:
• (1) Album
• (2) Artist
• (3) Genre
• (4) Playlist
• (5) Not Used
• (6) Not Used
351
Changing Song Lists Within a
Browse Mode
Each browse mode contains lists of songs. For
example, Genre mode might contain a list of
Classical songs, a list of Rock songs, and a list of
Country songs.
Once the audio system is set to one of the four
modes, press the SEEK/SCAN button to navigate
through the song lists. For example, press the
right arrow while in Album mode to change to the
next album. Press the left arrow to go back to
the previous Album item.
t SEEK/SCAN u: Press the SEEK/SCAN
button once to change to the next song list.
Mode 1 (Album Mode): Press the (1) pushbutton
to put the system into Album mode. Press the
right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change to
the next or previous Album. Albums are listed
alphabetically in groups of Artists.
352
Mode 2 (Artist Mode): Press the (2) pushbutton
to put the system into Artist mode. Press the
right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change to
the next or previous Artist. Artists are listed in
alphabetical order.
Mode 3 (Genre Mode): Press the (3) pushbutton
to put the system into Genre mode. Press the right
or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change to the
next or previous Genre in alphabetical order.
Mode 4 (Playlist Mode): Press the (4) pushbutton
to put the system into Playlist mode. Press the
right or left SEEK/SCAN arrow once to change to
the next or previous Playlist in the order the
playlists were saved to the DMS cartridge.
The Album, Artist, and Genre lists are generated
and organized automatically using the
Phatnoise™ Media Manager.
Seeking Through Song List Titles
t SEEK/SCAN u: Press and hold the
SEEK/SCAN button for more than 2 seconds to
start seeking through song list titles. Press
this button again to stop on a song list title.
The Digital Media system will announce the
following in each mode:
Mode 1 (Album Mode): Album names are
announced.
Using the GM Mobile Digital Media
System for Rear Seat Entertainment
Rear seat passengers
can enjoy audio, video
and games over the
wireless headphones.
Mode 2 (Artist Mode): Artist names are
announced. Press and hold the SEEK/SCAN
button until the system announces the first letter of
each artist name.
Mode 3 (Genre Mode): The first letter of Artist
names are announced in alphabetical order. Press
and hold the SEEK/SEEK button until the system
announces the first letter of each artist name.
Mode 4 (Playlist Mode): Seeking through songs
is not available in Playlist Mode.
Overhead Video Screen
Finding Songs in a Song List
Access to the Audio, Video, and Games on the
menu system is displayed on the video screen. The
DVD remote control and the controls on the DVD
player itself can be used to make the selections.
After finding a playlist, artist, album, or genre,
navigate through the songs by turning the
tune knob.
Using the Fast Forward and Fast Reverse
Buttons
{| (Fast Forward/Fast Reverse): Press and
hold the fast forward or fast reverse arrow to
fast forward or reverse within the current track.
353
Starting the System for Rear Seat
Entertainment
Navigating the On-Screen Menus Using
the DVD Remote Control
The GM Mobile Digital Media system is available
through the auxiliary mode of the DVD player.
The on-screen menus provide access to the
Audio, Video, and Game content on your digital
media storage (DMS) cartridge. Use the DVD
remote control to navigate the on-screen menus.
To begin using the system, follow the instruction
list below:
1. Insert the DMS cartridge into the GM Mobile
Digital Media player.
2. Turn on your video screen by pressing the
power button.
3. Switch to the DMS mode by pressing the AUX
button.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
354
Up List
Top Menu
Left
Down List
Select
F. Options
G. Right
H. Return to Current
Selection
n, q, p, o (Up List, Down List, Right, and
Left Directional Arrows): For the GM Mobile
Digital Media system, press the up list or down list
directional arrows (A, D) to move the highlight
area up or down the list of items.
Press the right directional arrow (G) to go further
into the selected item, or press the left directional
arrow (C) to go back one menu level.
r (Enter/Select): For the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, press the enter/select button (E) to
go into any selected menu item.
v (Title/Top Menu): For the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, press the title/top menu button (B) to
jump to the start screen.
q (Return/Current Selection): For the GM
Mobile Digital Media system, if audio is playing or
in the pause mode, press the return/current
selection button (H) to go back to the current
selection.
y (Menu/Options): For the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, press the menu/options button (F)
to display the options list.
c (Stop): For the GM Mobile Digital Media
system, press this button to stop playback of the
selected option.
r / j (Play/Pause): For the GM Mobile Digital
Media system, press this button to start playback
of a selected option. Press this button while
an option is in the play mode to pause it. Press it
again to continue playback of the current
option.
DVD Remote Control Batteries
If the remote control does not seem to be working,
the batteries may need to be replaced. See
Remote Control, “Battery Replacement” in your
vehicle’s owner manual.
355
Browsing Audio
1. Select the Audio option through the menu
system displayed on the video screen.
356
2. Press the up list or down list directional
arrows (A, D) on the remote control to
navigate through the menu options such as
album, artist, playlist or genre. See “Navigating
the On-Screen Menus Using the DVD
Remote Control” earlier in this section for
more information.
3. Press the select button (E) on the remote
control to begin playing an album, artist,
genre, playlist, or song. See “Navigating the
On-Screen Menus Using the DVD Remote
Control” earlier in this section for more
information.
4. If you want to find a particular song, press the
right directional arrow (G) on the remote
control to go further into the selected item.
See “Navigating the On-Screen Menus Using
the DVD Remote Control” earlier in this
section for more information.
357
Video Browsing
Browse digital videos stored on the system
through the menu display. MPEG format is
supported, so you can play back recorded shows
and movies from television, home movies,
downloaded videos and pre-packaged feature
films and shows. See the following instructions for
further screen display information:
2. Press the up list or down list directional
arrows (A, D) on the remote control to
navigate through preloaded videos and
unlocked video playlists. See “Navigating the
On-Screen Menus Using the DVD Remote
Control” earlier in this section for more
information.
1. Select the Video option through the menu
system displayed on the video screen.
358
Games Browsing
Browse games that are stored on the system
through the menu display. Video games are
preloaded on the DMS cartridge and played with
rich screen graphics and the included wireless
game controller.
3. If you want to find a particular video, press
the right directional arrow (G) on the remote
control to go further into the selected item.
See “Navigating the On-Screen Menus Using
the DVD Remote Control” earlier in this
section for more information.
1. Select the Games option through the menu
system displayed on the video screen.
359
2. Press the up list or down list directional
arrows (A, D) on the remote control to
navigate through the preloaded game
packages. Game packages can be purchased
and unlocked from your desktop computer.
See the PhatNoise™ Media Manager Owner’s
Manual for more information on how to
unlock games.
360
Wireless Game Controller
Wireless Game Controller Synchronization
In the event that your GM Mobile Digital Media
game controller needs to be re-synchronized with
your vehicle, open the battery compartment
and remove a battery. As soon as the battery is
replaced, the game controller will synchronize with
the vehicle during the next ignition cycle.
Wireless Game Controller Play Mode
The functionality of your GM Mobile Digital Media
Game Controller is dependant upon the game
being played. In cases where there are two player
options for a game, you may desire to have a
second controller in your vehicle which may
be purchased through your dealer.
A. Start Button
E. Left Thumbstick
B. Start Light
F. Left Rockerpad
G. Right Thumbstick
C. Select Button
D. Select Light
The wireless game controller transmits radio
frequency signals to the overhead monitor.
Wireless means, there are no cords to hinder your
movement while playing games.
The key pad as shown above has six buttons
located on the upper right side of the game
controller.
Wireless Game Controller Power
Saving Mode
Your GM Mobile Digital Media Game Controller
has a built-in power saving mode to conserve
battery life. When not in use, the game controller
will automatically go into “Sleep” mode. The
game controller can be awakened at any time by
pressing the “Start” button.
361
Important Safety and Handling
Instructions
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment may cause harmful
interference to radio communications, if it is not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions provided. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, consult the dealer for help.
362
This device also complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Read the following for instructions on handling and
taking care of your Mobile Digital Media system
and its components.
Digital Media Storage (DMS)
Cartridge Care
• Do not leave the DMS cartridge in locations
with extremely high temperatures such as
on a car dashboard or in the rear window
where it will be subject to direct sunlight.
• Do not drop the DMS cartridge or subject it to
a violent shock.
• Do not spill liquid on the DMS cartridge or
submerge the DMS cartridge in liquid. The
only effective protection for data and
other material stored on the DMS cartridge is
the regular backing up of that data by you.
Mobile Digital Media Player Care
• Never spray any type of liquid such as a
cleaning agent inside of an open cartridge
panel on the Digital Media player. Doing this
may damage the parts or inside mechanism
needed to help operate the unit.
• Do not use any object to probe the opening of
the Mobile Digital Media player and do not put
any body parts or other foreign objects in
the opening of the product.
363
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Cause and Solution
The Digital Media system and RSE system will not
come on at all.
• A fuse in the car has blown. After checking for short
The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA NOT
INSERTED.
• The DMS cartridge is not fully inserted. Fully insert
The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA LOADING.
• The system is still booting. Please wait up to
circuits in the wires, replace the fuse with one of the
same rating.
the DMS cartridge.
15 seconds for the system to boot and then switch
back to digital media mode.
The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA ERROR.
• The DMS cartridge is not operating properly or is
damaged. See your dealer if the problem persists.
The RSE screen displays DMS MEDIA FILE ERROR.
• A file on your DMS cartridge is corrupted and will
not play properly. Run the PhatNoise DMS Doctor
on your computer and follow the recommendations.
The green light blinks at a steady rate for longer than
20 seconds.
364
• You have updated the firmware on the DMS
cartridge and the Mobile Digital Media system is
reprogramming itself. DO NOT REMOVE THE DMS
CARTRIDGE. Allow the Digital Media system to
reprogram itself for up to 10 minutes. When
reprogramming is complete, the lights will turn off
and stay off. The system will be ready to use.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Problem
No Sound.
Cause and Solution
• Adjust the volume of the head unit.
• Make sure the head unit has the Digital Media
player as the active source.
No Sound.
The head unit cannot access the Digital Media system.
• File(s) on your cartridge may be corrupt. Run the
•
Audio skipping occurs during playback.
PhatNoise DMS Doctor on your computer and follow
the recommendations.
If you have just downloaded new firmware, this is
normal. Wait about seven minutes until the green
light stops blinking, then both lights should go off.
Many things can cause a “skip”, or any break during
playback. If you are hearing breaks in playback, here
are some things to check:
• When you hear a skip, restart the track, or seek
backwards a bit, to hear if the skip is actually in the
music file.
• Check to see if you are using the latest firmware
and desktop software. This is very important, as
software is updated frequently. See PhatNoise Music
Manager manual.
• Sometimes a heavily fragmented cartridge can skip
due to increased seek times. Defragment the
cartridge for best performance. See PhatNoise
Media Manager™ software instructions for
defragmenting a cartridge.
365
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont’d)
Problem
Cause and Solution
WMA files are not playing in the Mobile Digital Media
system.
Some software such as Windows Media Player features
copy protection in their WMA encoding tools. This
prevents the tracks from playing on any device other
than your computer. Disable any “Copy Protect Music”
check box when encoding music. Consult your
software’s manual for more information.
Voice prompts are missing in the vehicle.
Check your voice prompt settings on your desktop
computer:
• Insert the DMS.
• Open the Device view and select the DMS.
• Press the Hardware Options button.
• Open the DMS Database/Voice Prompts tab and
click Fix Voice Prompts.
366
Customer Assistance Center
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
For customer assistance in the United States, call
1-877-GM-PHATN (877-467-4286) or contact
the Customer Assistance Center through
the internet at gmmobilemediasupportgedas.com
For customer assistance in Canada, see the
Customer Assistance Offices in the index of your
vehicle’s owner manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate and
LOCKED will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not
operate if stolen.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio
controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
They include the following:
wt u x (Seek): Press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or previous station and stay
there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears
on the display. The radio will go to a station, play
for a few seconds, then go to the next station.
Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
The sound will mute while seeking or scanning.
367
The radio will only seek or scan stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
Radio Reception
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to
go to the previous or next track, if more than
eight seconds have played. If either arrow is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If
there is interference or static, unplug the item from
the accessory power outlet.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
1 - 6: Press this button to scan the stations that
are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will go to the next preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press this
button again to stop scanning. The radio will
only scan preset stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
$ (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, to turn the sound on.
r (Play): When listening to the radio, press this
button to play a CD.
wu x (Volume): Press the up or down arrow
to increase or decrease the volume.
368
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can
cause station frequencies to interfere with each
other. For better radio reception, most AM
radio stations will boost the power levels during
the day, and then reduce these levels during
the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the
treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.
The radio may display NO SIGNAL to indicate
interference.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
CD mechanism.
369
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime
level. To change the volume level of the chime,
press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition
on and the radio power off. The volume level will
change from the normal level to loud, and
LOUD will appear on the radio display. To change
back to the default or normal setting, press and
hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and
NORMAL will appear on the radio display.
Removing the radio and not replacing it with a
factory radio or chime module will disable vehicle
chimes.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the
hood of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle
can interfere with the performance of the XM™
system. Make sure that the XM™ satellite antenna
is not obstructed.
370
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle ............................................ 372
Defensive Driving ...................................... 372
Drunken Driving ........................................ 373
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 376
Braking ...................................................... 376
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 377
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 379
Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 379
StabiliTrak® System ................................... 381
Steering .................................................... 383
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 385
Passing ..................................................... 385
Loss of Control .......................................... 387
Driving at Night ......................................... 388
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 390
City Driving ............................................... 393
Freeway Driving ........................................ 394
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 395
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 396
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 397
Winter Driving ........................................... 399
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .......................................... 403
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 404
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 404
Towing ........................................................ 410
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 410
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 410
Level Control ............................................. 411
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 412
371
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 32.
372
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end
collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes
proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with
resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help
do these things, or pull off the road in a
safe place to do them. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one
contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For
persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon four
things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
373
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of body
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body
water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same
body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
374
But the ability to drive is affected well below a
BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that
the driving skills of many people are impaired at a
BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the
effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired
at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics
show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is
12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the
chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up. “I will
be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be
able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not
drink.
375
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go where you want it to go. They are the brakes,
the steering, and the accelerator. All three
systems have to do their work at the places where
the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 379 and
StabiliTrak® System on page 381.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 426.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 238.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might
be less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
376
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not have
time to cool between hard stops. The brakes
will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and
allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is
normal.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning
Light on page 239.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 426.
377
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
wheel.
378
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.
You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation
or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful
in slippery road conditions. The system operates if
it senses that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
this happens, the system brakes the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to
limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message will
come on in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
when the traction control system is limiting wheel
spin. You may feel or hear the system working,
but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
379
This warning light will
come on to let you
know if there is
a problem with your
traction control system.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message in
the DIC comes on and stays on or comes on
while you are driving, there’s a problem with your
traction control system. Have the traction
control system serviced by your GM dealer as
soon as possible.
When this warning message is on, the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message in the DIC will come
on to remind you that the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you can
turn the traction control system off if you ever need
to. You should turn the system off if your vehicle
380
ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out on page 404 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 403.
To turn the system off,
press the traction
control button located
on the center of
the instrument panel.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you
press the button, the TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE message will go off, but the system will
not turn off until there is no longer a current
need to limit wheel spin. The TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message will come on to remind
you the system is off. You can turn the system
back on at any time by pressing the button again.
The traction control system warning message
should go off.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 426 for more information.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with StabiliTrak®
which combines anti-lock brake, traction and
stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic
checks to insure there are no problems. You may
hear or feel the system working. This is normal and
does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). If
the vehicle has gone through heavy acceleration or
braking or multiple turns during the first two miles of
driving after starting your vehicle, the STABILITY
CONTROL OFF message may appear on the DIC.
If this is the case, your vehicle does not need
servicing. You will need to turn the vehicle off and
then restart it to initialize StabiliTrak®. If either
message appears on the DIC, and your vehicle has
not gone through hard acceleration, braking or
multiple turns in the first two miles of driving, your
vehicle should be taken in for service.
The STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message will
appear on the DIC only when the system is
both on and activated. It means that an advanced
computer-controlled system has come on to
help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in
which you are steering. StabiliTrak® activates
when the computer senses that your vehicle is just
starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of
ice or other slippery spot on the road. When
the system activates, you may hear a noise or feel
a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.
When the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
message is on, you should continue to steer in the
direction you want to go. The system is designed
to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving
situations by making the most of whatever road
conditions will permit. For more information on the
stability messages, see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 249.
If the StabiliTrak® system turns off, the traction
control system warning light will illuminate, and the
STABILITY CONTROL OFF message will
appear on the DIC to warn the driver that
StabiliTrak® is no longer available to assist you
with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
381
To realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak® on, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice
or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle to
attempt to free it. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get
It Out on page 404 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 403.
mode, the traction control system will only use
engine traction-control and is limited in its ability to
provide optimal performance since the system
will not utilize brake traction-control to control slip
on the drive wheels. The system will return to
normal operation after the brakes have cooled.
This can take up to two minutes or longer
depending on brake usage.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/
downshifts of the transaxle. When this happens you
may notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear
a noise or vibration. This is normal.
The traction control system is part of the
StabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheel
spin by reducing engine power to the wheels
(engine speed management) and by applying
brakes.
The traction control system is enabled
automatically when you start your vehicle. It will
activate and display the TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE message in the DIC if it senses that one
or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction while driving.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
message will appear on the DIC and the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When
road conditions allow you to use cruise again, you
may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise
Control on page 200.
If the brake traction-control system activates
constantly or if the brakes have heated up due to
high-speed braking, brake traction-control will
be disabled and the TRACTION CONTROL
ACTIVE message will be displayed. In the limited
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting
the vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
382
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning, you
can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one
factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both
control systems — steering and braking — have
to do their work where the tires meet the road.
Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,
adding the hard braking can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering
through a sharp curve and you suddenly
accelerate. Those two control systems — steering
and acceleration — can overwhelm those places
where the tires meet the road and make you lose
control. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 379 and StabiliTrak® System on page 381.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the
vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
383
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 426.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That
is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 376. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
384
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are
always possible is a good reason to practice
defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts
properly.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is
nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle
straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn
the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until
the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below
the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane
as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
385
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is
coming up, start to accelerate but stay in
the right lane and do not get too close.
386
Time your move so you will be increasing
speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than
makes up for the distance you would lose by
dropping back. And if something happens
to cause you to cancel your pass, you need
only slow down and drop back again and wait
for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change
signal before moving out of the right lane to
pass. When you are far enough ahead of
the passed vehicle to see its front in
your vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right
lane change signal and move back into
the right lane. Remember that your vehicle’s
passenger side outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a
time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before
passing the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are
not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps
avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction
control system is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
387
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Driving at Night
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
388
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
389
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
not have much tread left, you will get even less
traction. It is always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are
driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry
pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On
a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or
turn as well because your tire-to-road traction is
not as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do
390
It is wise to keep your windshield wiper and
washer system in good shape and keep your
windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer
fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber
start to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal
lightly until your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try
to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through your engine’s air intake and
badly damage your engine. Never drive through
water that is slightly lower than the underbody
of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep
puddles or standing water, drive through them
very slowly.
391
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried
away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
392
your parking lamps — to help make you more
visible to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially
careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow
yourself more clear room ahead, and be
prepared to have your view restricted by road
spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
Tires on page 477.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 394.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
393
Freeway Driving
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a
smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway
as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But
they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
394
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your
speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After
driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may
tend to think you are going slower than you
actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
you must start when you are not fresh — such as
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too many
miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable
clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out. Of
course, you will find experienced and able
service experts in GM dealerships all across North
America. They will be ready and willing to help
if you need it.
395
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
396
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they would not work
well. You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let your engine assist
your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
397
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have your
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can
climb the hill better.
398
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 477.
399
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have a traction system, it will improve your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery
road. But you can turn the traction system off if you
ever need to. You should turn the traction
system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand,
mud, ice, or snow. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck
in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 403. Even if
your vehicle has a traction system, you will
want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn the traction system off, such as
when driving through deep snow and loose gravel,
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 379
and StabiliTrak® System on page 381.
400
If you do not have a traction system, accelerate
gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you
accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) on page 377.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket
around you. If you do not have blankets
or extra clothing, make body insulators
from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
401
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
does not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
402
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transaxle back and forth, you can destroy
the transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out on page 404.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 496.
403
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels. If
your vehicle has traction control, you should
turn the traction control system off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 379 and
StabiliTrak® System on page 381. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels
in the forward and reverse directions, you will
cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that does not get your vehicle out after a few
tries, it may need to be towed out. If your vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 410.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
404
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 477 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 485.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your
vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
405
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 412 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,
and trailering tips.
406
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
300 lbs (136 kg)
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and 700 lbs (317 kg)
Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
407
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To
find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
408
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
409
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 562.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device know as a “dolly”).
410
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
a Long Trip on page 395.
Dinghy Towing
Level Control
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with
all of its wheels on the ground.It can be towed with
the two rear wheels on the ground. See “Dolly
Towing” following for more information.
On vehicles equipped with automatic level control,
the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept
level as you load or unload your vehicle. However,
you should still not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 404.
Dolly Towing
To dolly tow your vehicle, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
You may hear the compressor operating when you
load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as
the system self-adjusts. This is normal. The
compressor should operate for brief periods of
time. If the sound continues for an extended period
of time, your vehicle needs service.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
411
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all
the steps in this section. Ask your dealer
for advice and information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly
repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Always follow the instructions in this
section and check with your dealer for more
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
412
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify the
trailering capacity of vehicle, you should read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering
means changes in handling, acceleration, braking,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
That is the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate
at relatively higher speeds and under greater
loads, generating extra heat. The trailer also adds
considerably to wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you’ll be driving. A
good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle, or other parts could be
damaged.
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps your engine and other parts
of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• You can use THIRD (3) or, as you need to, a
lower gear when towing a trailer. Operating
your vehicle in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer
will minimize heat buildup and extend the
life of your transaxle.
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
• Weight of the trailer
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
413
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature, and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend on
any special equipment that you have on your
vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum
trailer weight for your vehicle.
Maximum Trailer
*GCWR
Axle Ratio
Weight
Two-Wheel-Drive
3.29
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
Any vehicle without the V92 trailering package or heavy-duty cooling package is limited to a 2,000 lb (907 kg) trailer
rating and a 7,000 lb (3 175 kg) GCWR.
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Vehicle
You can ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at the
address listed in your Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information Booklet.
414
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Center, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers,
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 404 for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
If you are using a weight-carrying or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue
weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not
exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight of
350 lbs (159 kg) for your vehicle.
415
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right simply by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional
weight may reduce your trailering capacity more
than the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle
and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It
has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR
of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross
Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs
(6 350 kg).
The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
because the weight is applied well behind the
rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater
than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle
could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs
(578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs
2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg)
brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very
close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as well.
The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front
seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with
some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.
416
You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle
weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle
weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect
that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly
handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity
to stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may
go further and think you must limit tongue weight
to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid
exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider the
effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle
now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put
900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without
exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is
about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the
900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able
to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You will find these
numbers on the Certification/Tire label at the rear
edge of the driver’s door or see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 404. Then be sure you do not go
over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including
the weight of the trailer tongue.
417
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough
roads are a few reasons why you will need
the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, remember to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you do not seal
them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle. See Engine
Exhaust on page 163. Dirt and water can, too.
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer to help
prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains and do not attach them to
the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so
you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they
must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be
able to install, adjust, and maintain them properly.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock
brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system. If you do, both brake systems will not
work well, or at all.
418
Driving with a Trailer
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It
can cause unconsciousness or death. See
Engine Exhaust on page 163. To maximize
your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected
for leaks, and make necessary repairs
before starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
through a window in the rear or
another opening, drive with your front,
main heating or cooling system on
and with the fan on any speed. This
will bring fresh, outside air into your
vehicle. Do not use the climate control
setting for maximum air because it
only recirculates the air inside your
vehicle. See Climate Control System
on page 217 or Dual Climate Control
System on page 220.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
419
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. If the
trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and
trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electrical
connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead
when you are towing a trailer. And, because
you are a good deal longer, you will need to go
much farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
420
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move
that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,
move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer will
not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
extra wiring.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs
on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It is important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
do not shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and
no longer work well.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs (450 kg), you may prefer to drive in
THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) or, as you need
to, a lower gear. This will minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill. If
something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, do
the following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift
into PARK (P).
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
421
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you do the following:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you are pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
Schedule for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are
automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts, cooling
system, and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a
good idea to review these sections before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle may have a trailer wiring harness
package located in the glove box. It can be
connected from the rear of your vehicle to your
trailer. Contact your dealer for more information.
422
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 426
Accessories and Modifications ................... 426
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 427
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 427
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .......................................... 428
Fuel ............................................................. 428
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 429
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 429
California Fuel ........................................... 429
Additives ................................................... 430
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ............................ 431
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 432
Filling the Tank ......................................... 433
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 435
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 436
Hood Release ........................................... 437
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 438
Engine Oil ................................................. 439
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 442
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 444
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 445
Engine Coolant .......................................... 448
Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 451
Engine Overheating ................................... 451
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ..................................... 453
Cooling System ......................................... 454
Power Steering Fluid ................................. 459
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 460
Brakes ...................................................... 462
Battery ...................................................... 465
Jump Starting ............................................ 466
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 471
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 471
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ........... 471
Front Turn Signal, Parking and Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) ........................... 473
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ...................................... 473
License Plate Lamp ................................... 475
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 475
423
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 476
Tires ............................................................ 477
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 478
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 482
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 485
High-Speed Operation ............................... 486
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 487
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 489
Buying New Tires ...................................... 490
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 492
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 493
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 494
Wheel Replacement .................................. 494
Tire Chains ............................................... 496
Accessory Inflator ...................................... 496
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 499
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 500
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 501
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ............................................. 504
Secondary Latch System ........................... 511
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 513
Compact Spare Tire .................................. 516
424
Appearance Care ........................................ 517
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 517
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 518
Leather ...................................................... 519
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 520
Child Restraint Pad ................................... 520
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in Child
Restraint Harness .................................. 520
Weatherstrips ............................................ 521
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 521
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 521
Finish Care ............................................... 522
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades ................................................... 522
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 523
Tires ......................................................... 523
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 524
Finish Damage .......................................... 524
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 524
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 524
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 525
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification .................................. 526
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 526
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 526
Electrical System ........................................ 526
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 526
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 527
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 527
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................. 527
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 527
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 528
Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 530
Capacities and Specifications .................... 533
425
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and
stability control. Some of these accessories may
even cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle
all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these
marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
426
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust,
many parts and systems (including some inside
the vehicle), many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or emit these
chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 574.
427
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 112.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 552.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
428
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep your engine clean and maintain optimum
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) shows the code letter or number that
identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at the
top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on page 526.
If your vehicle has the 3.9L V6 engine (VIN Code
W only), you may use either regular unleaded
gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85%
ethanol (E85); also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
on page 431. If your vehicle has the 3.9L V6
engine (VIN Code 1), use only regular unleaded
gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you may notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 242. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 430 for additional information.
429
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your GM dealer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines
may be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
430
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) shows the code letter or number that
identifies your engine. You will find the VIN at the
top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on page 526.
If your vehicle has the 3.9L V6 engine
(VIN Code W only), you may use either regular
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel on page 428.
If your vehicle has the 3.9L V6 engine
(VIN Code 1), use only regular unleaded gasoline.
Only vehicles that have the 3.9L V6 engine
(VIN Code W) may use 85% ethanol fuel (E85).
General Motors encourages the use of E85
in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol
in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made
from renewable sources such as corn and
other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department of
Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/
locator.html) that can help you find E85 fuel. Those
stations that do have E85 should have a label
indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if the
ethanol content is greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
Specification D 5798.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85
fuel must be formulated properly for your
climate according to ASTM specification D 5798.
If you have trouble starting on E85, it may be
because your E85 fuel is not properly formulated
for your climate. If this happens, switching to
gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel tank may
improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel
tank should contain no more than 70% ethanol.
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between
gasoline and E85. If you do switch fuels, it
is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible — do not add less than five gallons
(18.9 L) when refueling. You should drive
the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle to
adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
431
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so
you will need to refill your fuel tank more often
when using E85 than when you are using gasoline.
See Filling the Tank on page 433.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible
with E85 fuel and may harm your fuel system.
Damage caused by additives would not be
covered by your new vehicle warranty. Do not
use additives with E85 fuel.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in your fuel system and also damage
the plastic and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your warranty.
432
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when refueling your
vehicle. This is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If
the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, a yellow cap
with the words “E85 or gasoline” can be seen.
When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle
with dual sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding
door will only open partway.
433
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel
can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 521.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
434
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 242.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel
cap is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 256 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 242.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
CAUTION:
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping
gasoline.
(Continued)
435
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
436
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood
release handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located
under the instrument
panel on the
driver’s side.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push the
underhood release to the right. It is located
near the center of the hood, above the grille.
3. Lift the hood.
4. Pull up on the hood prop to release it from its
storage clip.
The hood prop may be hot due to increased
engine temperatures under the hood, so
be careful when handling it. Use your hood
prop sleeve when handling the hood prop.
5. Put the end of the hood prop into the slot in
the underside of the hood, on the driver’s
side of the vehicle. It is marked by an arrow.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lift the hood to relieve pressure
on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the hood and return the prop to its
retainer. Then let the hood down and close it
firmly.
437
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.9L V6 engine, here is what you will see:
438
A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
Block on page 530.
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 466.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 460.
D. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure
Cap on page 451.
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 459.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 439.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 439.
H. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 445.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 462.
J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 444.
K. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling
System on page 454.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 438
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
439
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, you will need to add at least one
quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right
kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 533.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the
proper operating range, the engine could be
damaged.
440
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 438 for the
location of the engine oil
fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range in the
cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for
and use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
You should look for this information on the oil
container, and use only those oils that are identified
as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the
starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
441
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will
provide easier cold starting and better protection
for the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
442
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 256. Change your oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and
at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
has GM-trained people who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is
also important to check your oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change. Remember to reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change your oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON
message being turned on, reset the system.
1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engine
off, repeatedly push the set/reset button until
OIL is displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
2. Once OIL is displayed, push and hold the
set/reset button for five seconds. The
number will disappear and be replaced
by 100 (indicating 100% oil life remaining).
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back
on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that
may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails
with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.
Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place
that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station, or a local recycling center
for help.
443
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (85 000 km) interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance on page 539 for more
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 438
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required. Do not use
compressed air to clean the filter.
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the two clamps on the duct.
2. Remove the duct.
3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
444
5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the
panel with the slots at the bottom of the
housing.
6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place.
If the panel moves easily, check that the tabs
are seated correctly in the slots.
7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 542, and
be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 548.
445
How to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to
200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage the transaxle. Too much can mean
that some of the fluid could come out and fall
on hot engine or exhaust system parts,
starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the
transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check the transaxle
fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
446
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to
five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean
rag or paper towel.
The automatic transaxle dipstick is located
toward the back of the engine compartment,
near the brake master cylinder reservoir.
The dipstick handle is a red loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 438 for
more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three
seconds, and then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 548.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the
proper fluid to bring the level into the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 548.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way.
447
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 451.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F
(−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning messages and gages work as
they should.
448
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
What Engine Coolant to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a
year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 548 for more information.
449
Adding Coolant
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery
tank is located on the
driver’s side of the
vehicle, above
the engine air
cleaner/filter. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 438
for more information
on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the full cold mark, or a little higher. When your
engine is warm, the level should be above the full
cold mark or a little higher. The full cold mark
is a line with an arrow pointing down at it, located
on the front of the coolant recovery tank.
450
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant
recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. With the coolant
recovery tank, you will almost never have
to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn
the radiator pressure cap — even a
little — when the engine and radiator
are hot.
Radiator Pressure Cap
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the
radiator. For information on how to add coolant to
the radiator, see Cooling System on page 454.
Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is a
pressure-type cap and must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss and possible
engine damage from overheating. Be sure
the cap is properly closed.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 438
for more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage
on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gage on page 241.
Your vehicle may also have an ENGINE
COOLANT HOT message displayed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 256.
451
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it
off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 453 for
information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.
452
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
on page 453 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — DRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and
get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” later in this section.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists, an overheat protection mode
which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this mode, you
will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage will
indicate an overheat condition exists. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss, change the oil and reset the oil life
system. See Engine Oil on page 439.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
453
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Electric Engine Cooling Fans
Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
Recovery tank FULL COLD mark
454
The coolant level should be at or above the
full cold mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If
you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 453 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
455
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the
coolant level is not at or above the full cold mark,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolant
recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 448
for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
456
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is
at or above the full cold mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one
more thing you can try. You can add the proper
coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — they can come out at high
speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and radiator pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged.
1. You can remove the
radiator pressure
cap when the
cooling system,
including the radiator
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there is still
some pressure left, close the cap and wait for
the system to cool down.
457
2. Keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 448
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture.
458
4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the
engine and the compartment.
5. Start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
6. By this time, the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture through the filler neck until the
level reaches the base of the filler neck.
7. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time
during this procedure if coolant begins to flow
out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure
cap. Be sure the pressure cap is closed
properly.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located
toward the rear of the
engine compartment on
the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 438
for reservoir location.
Filling the Coolant Recovery Tank
8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the full
cold mark.
9. Put the cap back on the coolant
recovery tank.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in
the system or you hear an unusual noise. A
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
459
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 548.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir
clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
Windshield Washer Fluid
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
The fluid level should be somewhere within the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is at
the ADD mark, you should add fluid.
460
What Washer Fluid to Use
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 438
for reservoir location.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
461
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 438 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have your
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or
will not work at all.
462
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will
have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if
the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your
brake warning light will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 238.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 548.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in your brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 521.
463
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound may come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
464
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with
top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts
of your braking system — for example, when your
brake linings wear down and you need new ones
put in — be sure you get new approved GM
replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may
no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep
your battery from running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 466 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
465
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
On vehicles equipped with the optional power
sliding door, a low-voltage battery or replacing a
battery may cause the system to become
inoperative. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on
page 134 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
466
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or
a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting
the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are
not needed. This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries. And it could save
the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal
locations on each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for
jump starting. Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) jump starting terminal for
that purpose.
The terminal is located
under the fuse block
cover. Remove
the cover to access the
remote positive (+)
terminal.
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 438 for more information on the location
of the remote positive (+) terminal. You
should always use the remote positive (+)
terminal instead of the positive (+) terminal on
your battery.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
467
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle. But
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
468
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)
will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a short that
would damage the battery and maybe other
parts too. Do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It
goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part,
or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but not near engine
parts that move. The electrical connection is
just as good there, and the chance of
sparks getting back to the battery is much
less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
469
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover
or underhood fuse block cover to its original
position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
and Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
470
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 475.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
A. High-beam Headlamp
B. Low-beam Headlamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
471
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 437 for more information.
4. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the socket wiring harness
connector from the headlamp assembly.
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove from the assembly.
7. To replace a headlamp bulb, disconnect the
bulb socket wiring harness and connect to the
new bulb socket.
To replace a sidemarker bulb, pull the old bulb
out and push a new bulb in.
8. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into the
bulb assembly and turning it clockwise to
secure.
9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
2. Remove the headlamp retainer pin (A) by
turning it towards the headlamp assembly
and pulling it straight out.
3. Remove the screw (B) from the top of the
headlamp assembly.
472
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
5. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into the
bulb assembly and turning it clockwise to
secure.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs (A), do the following:
1. Follow the Steps 1 through 4 to remove the
headlamp assembly. See Headlamps and
Sidemarker Lamps on page 471 for more
information.
To change a stoplamp/taillamp, turn signal or
back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 141
for more information.
2. Remove the two
screws from the
taillamp housing on
the inboard side.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove from the assembly.
3. Pull the old bulb out from the bulb socket.
4. Replace with a new bulb.
473
3. Pull out the taillamp housing.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from
the taillamp assembly.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove.
6. Replace the bulb by pulling the old bulb out of
the socket and gently pushing in a new bulb.
7. Replace the bulb socket by inserting
and turning clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by inserting
the outboard locating/retaining pins until the
lamp is seated.
9. Secure with the inboard screws.
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-up Lamp Bulb
474
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the two screws holding each of
the license plate lamps to the fascia.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up
Front Turn Signal, DRL and
Parking
High-Beam and Low-Beam
Headlamps
License Plate Lamp
Sidemarker
Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal
Bulb Number
3057KX
3157NAK
H11
168
194
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
license plate lamp.
475
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 539 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 550.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly
do the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
476
2. Squeeze the tabs (B) on each side of the
wiper blade assembly to remove the wiper
arm (A) from the blade (C).
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage
that occurs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to
touch the windshield.
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the
wiper arm until you hear the tabs on each side
of the wiper blade assembly click into place.
To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the steps
listed above.
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 404.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 485.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
(Continued)
477
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
478
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 493.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If
your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
Compact Spare Tire on page 516 and If a Tire
Goes Flat on page 499.
479
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
480
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 485.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as
high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
481
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic
transmission/transaxle, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
482
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 485.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 404.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 404.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 404.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 404.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 485 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 404.
483
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 489.
484
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 493.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 404.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 404.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the
driver’s door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the correct inflation
pressures for your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure,
shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air
pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the tire and loading information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 404. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 516.
485
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
486
High-Speed Operation
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
strain on tires. Sustained high-speed
driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You
could have a crash and you or others
could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment
for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition,
and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
If your vehicle has P225/60R17 size tires, they will
require inflation pressure adjustment when
driving your vehicle at speeds of 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher. Set the cold inflation
pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown
on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (262 kPa),
whichever is lower. See the example following.
When you end this high-speed driving, return the
tires to the cold tire inflation pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 404 and
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 485.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation
pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small
letters, near the rim flange. It will read something
like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs)
300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 489
and Wheel Replacement on page 494 for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 539.
For this example, you would set the inflation
pressure for high-speed driving at
38 psi (262 kPa).
487
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 533.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
488
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or
dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 500.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
489
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were
designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM
strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 478 for additional information.
490
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 516.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. This
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 404,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
491
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 490 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 426 for
additional information.
492
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
493
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
494
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way, you
will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 500 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
495
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
CAUTION:
496
(Continued)
(Continued)
readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them
on the front tires.
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator. With
it, you can inflate things like air mattresses and
basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your
tires up to the proper pressure.
The accessory inflator is located in the rear
compartment on the driver’s side. To access the
accessory inflator, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 141
for more information.
2. Lift the lever to move the third row rear
seatback forward. See Third Row Seat
on page 27 for more information.
3. Remove the cover by pulling the lever up.
This symbol is on the
accessory inflator
switch.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be
injured. Be sure to read the inflator
instructions, and inflate any object only to
its recommended pressure.
There may be an accessory inflator kit stored in
the rear compartment on the passenger’s
side. It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air
pressure gage and nozzle adapters.
To use your accessory inflator system, do the
following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if
required, to the end of the hose that has
the pressure gage.
3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you
wish to inflate.
497
4. Remove the protective cap covering the
outlet.
5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The
light in the switch will come on to show
the system is working.
If the accessory inflator system does not turn on
or the light does not come on, the fuse may
be blown or installed incorrectly. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 527 or see your
retailer for service.
Your accessory inflator will automatically shut off
after about 10 minutes. The light in the switch
will blink. After about one minute you can use the
system again. Press the switch and the indicator
light will come on.
498
Notice: If you run the accessory inflator
longer than 30 minutes at a time, you could
damage the inflator. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Run the inflator
for short periods of time only.
After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes,
wait at least 10 minutes before restarting the
accessory inflator.
To turn off the inflator, do the following:
1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first
from the inflated object, then from the outlet.
2. Put the protective cap back on.
3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and
store in the rear compartment on the
passenger’s side.
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the
bottom of the cover and put it in place. Push down
the tab to secure the cover.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out
of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use
the jacking equipment to change a flat tire
safely.
499
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See
Hazard Warning Flashers on page 194 for more
information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION:
500
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
The tools needed to remove the spare tire are
located in the storage compartment at the rear of
the vehicle, on the passenger’s side.
To remove the tools, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 141
for more information.
2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle
has one.
501
3. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting
the tab and pulling the cover off.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
extension (B), and folding wrench (C).
A. Jack
B. Strap
C. Bracket
D. Wing Nut
E. Bag and Tools
4. Remove the jack (A) and jacking tools (E) by
loosening and then removing the wing nut (D)
and bracket (C).
5. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and
remove the jacking tools, including the folding
wrench and extension, from the pouch.
502
The compact spare tire is located under the rear of
the vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 516
for more information about the compact spare.
To remove the compact spare tire, do the
following:
1. Attach the folding wrench (F) to the
extension (E) and insert the chisel end on an
angle through the hole in the rear bumper
and into the hoist shaft (A).
2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to
lower the compact spare tire (D) to the
ground. Continue to turn the wrench so the
compact spare tire can be pulled out from
under the vehicle.
A. Hoist Shaft
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Retainer
D. Compact Spare Tire
E. Extension (Chisel End)
F. Folding Wrench
503
If the compact spare tire will not lower, check
under the vehicle to see if the tire is hanging loose
and the cable end and spring under the wheel
plate are missing. If so, the secondary latch
system is engaged. See Secondary Latch System
on page 511.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing
the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on
page 504.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
3. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable to
remove the compact spare tire, so it can
be pulled up through the wheel opening.
The hoist is used to store a full-size or a flat
road tire under the vehicle. See Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 513 for
more information.
4. Remove the compact spare tire from the cable.
504
Your vehicle may have aluminum wheels. If so, you
will see exposed stainless steel wheel nuts. Use the
wheel wrench to loosen all of the wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet. Or, your vehicle may have steel
wheel covers. To remove the wheel covers and
wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic nut caps with the
wheel wrench in a counterclockwise direction. If
needed, you can finish loosening with your fingers.
The plastic nut caps will not come off. Use the flat
end of the wheel wrench and pry along the edge of
the cover until it comes off. The edge of the wheel
cover could be sharp, so do not try to remove it with
your bare hands. Do not drop the cover or lay it face
down, as it could become scratched or damaged.
Once you have removed the wheel cover, use the
following procedure to remove the flat tire and
install the spare tire.
1. Loosen the wheel
nuts using the
folding wrench,
but do not
remove them.
Turn the handle counterclockwise about
180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the
starting position. This avoids taking the
wrench off the lug nut for each turn.
Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and
you use an impact wrench to remove the wheel
nuts, you could damage the lock nut or
wheel lock key. Do not use an impact wrench
to remove the wheel nuts if your vehicle
has wheel locks.
505
Notice: If you use a jack to raise the vehicle
without positioning it correctly, you could
damage your vehicle. When raising your
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact with the rear
axle control arms.
Notice: If you position the jack under the
rocker molding and attempt to raise the
vehicle, you could break the molding and/or
cause other damage to your vehicle. Always
position the jack so that when the jack head is
raised, it will fit firmly in the notch located
inboard from the rocker molding.
A. Front Location
B. Rear Location
2. Near each wheel, there is a notch (A and B)
in the vehicle’s frame, inboard of the rocker
molding. Position the jack and raise the
jack head until it fits firmly into the notch in
the vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire.
Do not raise the vehicle yet.
3. Put the compact spare tire near you.
506
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
4. Attach the folding wrench (A) to the jack (B),
and turn the wrench clockwise to raise the
jack head approximately 3 inches (7.6 cm).
507
{CAUTION:
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding
wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is
enough room for the compact spare tire
to fit under the wheel well.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the
flat tire.
508
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after a time. The
wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
7. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare
wheel.
{CAUTION:
8. Install the compact
spare tire and put
the wheel nuts back
on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the
wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is
held against the hub.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
509
{CAUTION:
9. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding
wheel wrench to the jack and turning the
wrench counterclockwise. Lower the
jack completely.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 533
for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 533 for
the wheel nut torque specification.
510
10. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence,
as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover
on the compact spare, you could damage
the cover or the spare.
11. Do not try to put a wheel cover on the
compact spare tire. It will not fit. Store
the wheel cover securely in the rear of the
vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle may have an underbody-mounted tire
hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch
system. It is designed to stop a tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the
spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to
work, the tire must be stowed with the valve
stem pointing down.
Your vehicle uses the underbody tire hoist
assembly to store either the compact spare or a
flat road tire. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 513 for instructions on storing
the spare or flat tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all
the instructions. Failure to read and follow
the instructions could damage the hoist
assembly and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the instructions
listed next.
511
{CAUTION:
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If
the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from the spare.
1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the
jack under the center of the compact spare tire.
2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the
jack until it lifts the secondary latch device
under the wheel plate.
3. Keep raising the jack until the compact spare
tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in
place. This lets you know that the secondary
latch has released.
512
4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the compact spare tire is resting on the
folding wrench.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both hands
and pull it out from under the vehicle.
6. Reach under the vehicle and remove the
folding wrench and jack.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as
you can. You will not be able to store a spare or
flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has
been repaired or replaced.
513
Storing the Flat or Spare Tire
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs
to be stored with the valve stem pointing
down. If the spare tire is stored with the
valve stem pointing upwards, its
secondary latch will not work properly
and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being
driven, the tire might contact a person or
another vehicle, causing injury and, of
course, damage to itself as well. Be sure
the underbody-mounted spare tire is
stored with its valve stem pointing down.
514
To store the spare tire, do the following:
1. Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle with
the valve stem down.
2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the
back of the cap with the extension of the
shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Slide the cable retainer through the center of
the wheel and start to raise the tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel.
4. When the tire is almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is towards the rear of
the vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain
tire pressure in the spare.
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue turning the folding
wrench until you feel more than two clicks.
This indicates that the compact spare
tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare
tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
Storing the Tools
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the
tire moves, use the folding wrench to
tighten the cable.
A. Strap
B. Bag and Tools
C. Jack
Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
515
To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the right
of the cover with the slots in the cover opening.
Push the cover in place and push down the tab so
that it rests in the groove. This secures the
cover in place.
Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel
covers until a full size tire is put back on the
vehicle. When you replace the compact spare with
a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers
or the center cap. Hand-tighten them over
the wheel nuts, using the folding wrench.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It
should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles
516
(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have
the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the
spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The
spare tire will last longer and be in good shape
in case it is needed again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire
chains on your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,
you can also obtain a product from your GM dealer
to remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
517
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
518
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more can be
removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
519
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
520
Child Restraint Pad
The built-in child restraint pad is attached to the
seat frame with fastener strips. You can remove
the pad and hand wash it with mild soap and
water.
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in
Child Restraint Harness
Keep the safety belts and the built-in child
restraint harness clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts or the
built-in child restraint harness. If you do,
they may be severely weakened. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean the safety
belts and the child restraint harness only
with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Washing Your Vehicle
residue completely. GM-approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 525.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All
cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and
not allowed to dry on the surface, or they
could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 548.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 521.
521
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 525.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
522
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help keep the
paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
garage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
523
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair
shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
524
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Description
Finish Enhancer
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
525
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove
box. It is very helpful if you ever need to order
parts. On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
526
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 112.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by four internal
fuses in the underhood fuse block. An electrical
overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or
in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an
internal fuse in the underhood fuse block. If
the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the
wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem, be
sure to get it fixed.
The rear washer pump is controlled by a relay
located in the engine compartment, behind
the windshield washer fluid reservoir. The rear
wiper motor is protected by a fuse located in the
instrument panel fuse block.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel
protect the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting
the circuit until the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of
the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has
the same amperage or use one of the spare fuses
in the underhood fuse block. Just pick some
feature of your vehicle that you can get along
without, like the radio or cigarette lighter, and use
its fuse if it is the right amperage. Replace it
as soon as you can.
527
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle, the
instrument panel fuse block and the underhood
fuse block.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located at the
right end of the instrument panel, on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. Open the front
passegner’s door, and remove the cover, to
access the fuse block.
Your vehicle may not have all of the fuses listed.
528
Fuses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Usage
Trunk, Door Locks
Electronic Level Control
Rear Wiper
Radio, DVD Player
Interior Lamps
OnStar®
Keyless Entry Module
Cluster, Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning
Cruise Switch
Steering Wheel Illumination
Power Mirror
Stoplamp, Turn Lamps
Heated Seats
Blank
Electronic Level Control
Heated Mirror
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamps
Blank
Fuses
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Usage
Canister Vent Solenoid
Park Lamps
Power Sliding Door
Blank
Blank
Left Power Sliding Door
Right Power Sliding Door
Relays
26
27
28
29
30
PLR
Usage
Blank
Blank
Park Lamps, Taillamps
Retained Accessory Power
Rear Defog
Fuse Puller
Circuit
Breakers
31
32
Usage
Power Seats
Power Window
529
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment. For more information on location see
Engine Compartment Overview on page 438.
Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed.
530
Fuses
1
2
3
BLANK
BLANK
4
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Usage
Right High-Beam
Fuel Pump
Diode
Not Used
Not Used
Left High-Beam
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Air Conditioning Clutch
Horn
Left Low-Beam
Powertrain Control Module,
Electronic Throttle Control
Not Used
Transmission Solenoid
Right Low-Beam
Fuses
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Usage
Anti-lock Brake System
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
Electronic Ignition
Fuel Injector
Climate Control, RPA, Cruise
Control
Electronic Throttle Control
Engine Sensor, Evaporator
Airbag
Not Used
Not Used
Auxiliary Power
Front Windshield Washer
AC/DC Inverter
Rear Blower
Front Blower
Front Windshield Wiper
531
J-Case Fuses
PLR
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Relays
RUN RLY
LO BEAM
FUEL PUMP
532
Usage
Fuse Puller
Fan 1
Starter Solenoid
Anti-lock Brake System Motor
Blank
Fan 2
Front Blower High
Battery Main 3
Rear Defogger
Battery Main 2
Spare
Usage
Starter
Low-Beam
Fuel Pump
Relays
HORN
AC/CLTCH
HI BEAM
PWR/TRN
WPR2
WPR1
FAN 1
CRNK
IGN MAIN
FAN2
FAN3
BLANK
Usage
Horn
Air Conditioning Clutch
High-Beam
Powertrain
Wiper 2
Wiper 1
Fan 1
Crank
Ignition Main
Fan 2
Fan 3
Not Used
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 548 for more information.
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
7.4 qt
7.0 L
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Automatic Transaxle — Pan Removal and Replacement
Cooling System
3.9L Engine Front Climate Controls Only
10.77 qt
10.2 L
3.9L Engine with Rear Climate Controls
12.11 qt
11.55 L
Engine Oil with Filter
4.0 qt
3.8 L
Fuel Capacity
Regular
20.0 gal
75.7 L
Extended
25.1 gal
95.0 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 ft lb
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine
3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel
3.9L V6
VIN Code
W
1
Transaxle
Automatic
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
0.040 inches (1.1 mm)
0.040 inches (1.1 mm)
533
✍ NOTES
534
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 536
Introduction ............................................... 536
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 536
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 536
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 537
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 539
Additional Required Services ..................... 542
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 543
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 544
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 545
At Least Once a Month ............................. 545
At Least Once a Year ............................... 546
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 548
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 550
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 551
Maintenance Record .................................. 552
535
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
536
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements. So
please read the following and note how you
drive. If you have any questions on how to keep
your vehicle in good condition, see your GM
Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 404.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 429.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 539 should be performed when indicated.
See Additional Required Services on page 542 and
Maintenance Footnotes on page 543 for further
information.
537
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If
you have any doubt, see your GM
Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 427.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
538
If you want to purchase service information, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 574.
Owner Checks and Services on page 544 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 548 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 550.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes
on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 442 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service be
Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
539
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 439. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 442. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 444. See footnote (g).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 487 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 545.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
540
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
•
541
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 444.
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
(severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter
(normal service).
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
542
Maintenance Footnotes
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage,
transaxle shift linkage, and the underbody contact
points and linkage.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check
parking brake adjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts, signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect
power steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with
genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear worn
or damaged or that streak or miss areas of
the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. If your vehicle
has a built-in child restraint, make sure the harness
straps, latch plates, buckle, clip, child head
restraint, and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken
airbag coverings, and have them repaired
or replaced. The airbag system does not need
regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring
anchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,
rear folding seats, liftgate hinges, fuel door
hinge, power sliding door cable, and sliding door
track(s). More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
543
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if
the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or
higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. See
Engine Coolant on page 448 for what to
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
544
(j) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid
if needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
the filter may require replacement more often.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
the safety, dependability, and emission control
performance of your vehicle. Your GM
Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 548.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 439 for
further details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure
to keep your engine oil at the proper level
can cause damage to your engine not covered
by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure
they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 485. Check to make sure the
spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 500.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 487.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 448 for further details.
545
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on
page 159.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it
starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
546
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 159.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
547
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
548
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 439.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 448.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM
Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Usage
Chassis
Lubrication
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door
Hinges, Rear
Folding Seat, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Fuel Door
Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Hinge, Liftgate (GM
Canada 10953474).
Hinges and
Power Sliding
Door Cable
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Sliding Door
Canada 992723) or lubricant
Track
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No.
3634770, in Canada
Weatherstrip U.S.
10953518) or Dielectric Silicone
Conditioning
Grease (GM Part No. U.S.
12345579, in Canada 992887).
549
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side — 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side — 24.0 inches (60.0 cm)
Rear — 16.0 inches (40.0 cm)
550
GM Part Number
15222510
89017342
12591131
ACDelco® Part Number
—
PF61
41-100
12335833
12335834
15192147
—
—
—
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.9L V6 Engine and 3.9L V6 Flexible Fuel
551
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the
service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on
page 536. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 544 can be added on the
following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
552
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
553
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
554
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 556
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 556
Online Owner Center ................................. 559
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 560
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 560
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 561
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 562
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 565
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .............................................. 567
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 568
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 573
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 573
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 573
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ...................................... 573
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 574
555
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service, or parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the Chevrolet
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
556
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the BBB
Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue
for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program
using the toll-free telephone number or write them
at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General
Motors reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its participation in
this program.
557
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
558
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center (United
States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
559
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user can communicate with Chevrolet by
dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the
toll-free number for assistance. However, if a
customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the
letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
560
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for
your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
561
Roadside Assistance Program
In the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872)
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
562
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres
in Canada). Service to provide diesel may be
restricted. For safety reasons, propane
and other alternative fuels will not be provided
through this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration and
personal ID before lock-out service is provided.
Lock-out service will be covered at no charge if
you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start, Roadside
Assistance will arrange to have your vehicle
towed to the nearest authorized dealership.
In the U.S., replacement keys made at the
customer’s expense will be covered within
10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: If your vehicle has a spare
tire, installation of the tire in good condition will
be covered at no charge. The customer is
responsible for the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start will be covered at
no charge.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the
most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with any
helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,
but it is best to allow three weeks before your
planned departure date. Trip routing requests
will be limited to six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense you
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and
a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
563
• Alternative Service: There may be times,
when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance, your advisor may authorize
you to secure local emergency road service,
and you will be reimbursed up to $100 upon
submission of the original receipt to Roadside
Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are
covered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty, and the duration of the Base Warranty
Coverage for Canadian customers of the new
Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for
parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are
the responsibility of the driver.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
564
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away. U.S. customers call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers
call 1-800-268-6800.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation program.
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an
appointment. By scheduling a service appointment
and advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
565
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used as ‘shuttle
service,’ the reimbursement is limited to the
associated shuttle allowance and must be
supported by original receipts.
566
In addition, for U.S. customers, should you
arrange transportation through a friend or relative,
limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported by original
receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may
not be available at every dealer. Please contact
your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms
and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has
a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some
information may be stored during regular operations
to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; other
information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
Event Data Recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated,
such as data related to engine speed, brake
application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety
belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is
equipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,
including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, and
lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not
record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle
occupants.
567
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
568
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check the
OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data
collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A
recycled original equipment GM part, may
be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a
result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center that
has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
569
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it by a
police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 562 for more
information.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease
carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
570
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information and
registration if you keep these items in your
vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of
the damage to the other vehicle.
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If
they ask for a police report, phone or go to
the police department headquarters the
next day and you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility
for your vehicle. Whether you select a
GM dealer or a private collision repair facility
to fix the damage, make sure you are
comfortable with them. Remember, you will
have to feel comfortable with their work
for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work
will be performed on your vehicle. If you have
a question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
571
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the facility that
any required replacement collision parts be original
equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled
parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty.
572
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is
leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if
your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying
for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you will notify General Motors. Please call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
573
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Bulletins
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your General Motors
dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483). This reference number is
needed to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
574
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$6.00 US + Processing Fee
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner
manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for
all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 US + Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 US + Processing Fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
575
✍ NOTES
576
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 426
Accessory Inflator ........................................ 496
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 214
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................... 113
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 430
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 526
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 444
Air Conditioning .................................. 217, 220
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 235
Readiness Light ....................................... 234
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) .......................................... 567
Airbag System ............................................... 96
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................... 113
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................ 104
Passenger Sensing System ...................... 106
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 112
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................ 103
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ..................................... 104
Airbag System (cont.)
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ............... 101
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 99
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 370
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System .................................................... 370
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 377
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 239
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 523
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in
Child Restraint Harness ........................ 520
Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 524
Child Restraint Pad .................................. 520
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 521
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 517
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 518
Finish Care .............................................. 522
Finish Damage ......................................... 524
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 520
Leather .................................................... 519
Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 524
Tires ........................................................ 523
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 524
577
Appearance Care (cont.)
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ........................................
Audio System(s) ..........................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ...................
Chime Level Adjustment ...........................
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................
Mobile Digital Media System ....................
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................
Radio with CD .........................................
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................... 340,
Setting the Time ......................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................
Understanding Radio Reception ...............
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......
Automatic Door Lock ...................................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ........................................................
Operation .................................................
578
525
521
521
522
284
367
369
369
370
370
345
309
286
343
285
367
368
370
131
445
155
B
Battery ........................................................ 465
Electric Power Management ..................... 210
Run-Down Protection ............................... 211
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 395
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 377
Emergencies ............................................ 379
Parking .................................................... 159
System Warning Light .............................. 238
Brakes ........................................................ 462
Braking ....................................................... 376
Braking in Emergencies ............................... 379
Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 150
Bucket Seats, Rear ....................................... 13
Built-in Child Restraint ................................... 85
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 471
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps ....................... 473
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 471
License Plate Lamps ................................ 475
Replacement Bulbs .................................. 475
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ..................................... 473
Buying New Tires ........................................ 490
C
Calibration ................................................... 254
California Fuel ............................................. 429
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 427
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 533
Captain Chairs, Rear ..................................... 22
Carbon Monoxide .............. 141, 163, 399, 412
Care of
Safety Belts and Built-in Child
Restraint Harness ................................. 520
Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 369
Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 369
Cargo Lamp ................................................ 210
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 301
Chains, Tire ................................................. 496
Charging System Light ................................ 237
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 242
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 436
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 524
Child Restraints
Built-In Child Restraint ............................... 85
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 63
Infants and Young Children ........................ 59
Child Restraints (cont.)
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ....... 70
Older Children ........................................... 56
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................. 77
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ........................ 80
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 68
Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 370
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 216
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 523
Child Restraint Pad .................................. 520
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 521
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 518
Finish Care .............................................. 522
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 517
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 520
Leather .................................................... 519
Tires ........................................................ 523
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 524
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 521
Weatherstrips ........................................... 521
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ........................................ 522
579
Climate Control System ............................... 217
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 228
Dual ......................................................... 220
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 223
Rear ............................................... 224, 226
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 568
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 52
Compact Spare Tire .................................... 516
Compass ..................................................... 254
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 146
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 376
Convenience Center .................................... 186
Convenience Net ................................ 185, 186
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 241
Heater, Engine ......................................... 154
Cooling System ........................................... 454
Cruise Control ............................................. 200
Cruise Control Light .................................... 247
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 180
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 565
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 560
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 560
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 556
580
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ......
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .....................................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
561
573
573
573
562
574
D
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ....................................
Defensive Driving ........................................
Delayed Lighting ..........................................
Delayed Locking ..........................................
DIC Compass ..............................................
Disc, MP3 ...................................................
Doing Your Own Service Work ....................
Dome Lamp ................................................
Door
Automatic Door Lock ................................
Delayed Locking ......................................
205
372
208
130
254
301
427
207
131
130
Door (cont.)
Dual Sliding Doors ................................... 131
Locks ....................................................... 128
Power Door Locks ................................... 129
Power Sliding Door .................................. 134
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 131
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 38
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 249
DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 249
DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 275
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 256
Driving
At Night ................................................... 388
City .......................................................... 393
Defensive ................................................. 372
Drunken ................................................... 373
Freeway ................................................... 394
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 397
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 390
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 404
Winter ...................................................... 399
Dual Climate Control System ....................... 220
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..... 309, 324
E
Electric Power Management ........................
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Headlamp Wiring .....................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...........................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................
Battery .....................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light .....
Coolant ....................................................
Coolant Heater .........................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ......................
Drive Belt Routing ....................................
Engine Compartment Overview ................
Exhaust ...................................................
Oil ...........................................................
Oil Life System ........................................
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ....
Overheating .............................................
Starting ....................................................
210
526
527
527
528
527
530
527
444
465
242
448
154
241
551
438
163
439
442
453
451
152
581
Entry Lighting .............................................. 208
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 567
Exit Lighting ................................................ 209
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 55
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 204
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................
Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Flat Tire ......................................................
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................
Flat Tire, Storing .........................................
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle .................................
Power Steering ........................................
Windshield Washer ..................................
582
444
524
370
194
197
499
500
513
445
459
460
Folding Tray ................................................
Front Console Storage Area ........................
Front Reading Lamps ..................................
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps ..........................
Fuel ............................................................
Additives ..................................................
California Fuel ..........................................
E85 (85% Ethanol) ...................................
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..............
Filling Your Tank ......................................
Fuels in Foreign Countries .......................
Gage .......................................................
Gasoline Octane ......................................
Gasoline Specifications ............................
Low Warning Light ...................................
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Windshield Wiper .....................................
183
183
209
473
428
430
429
431
435
433
432
248
429
429
248
527
528
530
527
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel .........................................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Tachometer ..............................................
Garage Door Opener .......................... 169,
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
Glove Box ...................................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
241
248
232
232
170
429
429
180
561
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 194
Head Restraints ............................................ 13
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 527
Headlamps
Bulb Replacement .................................... 471
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ................................ 205
Headlamps (cont.)
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 197
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 471
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .......... 471
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 197
On Reminder ........................................... 205
Wiper Activated ........................................ 205
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ............. 471
Heated Seats ................................................ 10
Heater ................................................ 217, 220
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 247
High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 486
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 396
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 397
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 436
Release ................................................... 437
Horn ............................................................ 194
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 37
583
I
L
Ignition Positions ......................................... 151
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 59
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 485
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 192
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 206
Cluster ..................................................... 231
Interior Lamps Control ................................. 207
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 478
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 211
Cargo ...................................................... 210
Dome ....................................................... 207
Electric Power Management ..................... 210
Exterior .................................................... 204
Front Reading .......................................... 209
Interior Control ......................................... 207
Rear Reading .......................................... 209
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 70
Level Control ............................................... 411
License Plate Lamps ................................... 475
Liftgate ........................................................ 141
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 234
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 239
Brake System Warning ............................. 238
Charging System ..................................... 237
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 466
K
Keyless Entry System ................................. 120
Keys ........................................................... 119
584
Light (cont.)
Cruise Control ..........................................
Highbeam On ..........................................
Low Fuel Warning ....................................
Malfunction Indicator ................................
Oil Pressure .............................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder ..............
Safety Belt Reminder ...............................
Security ...................................................
TCS Warning Light ..................................
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .....
Lighting
Delayed ...................................................
Entry ........................................................
Exit ..........................................................
Loading Your Vehicle ...................................
Lockout Protection .......................................
Locks
Automatic Door Lock ................................
Delayed Locking ......................................
Door ........................................................
Lockout Protection ...................................
Power Door .............................................
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .....
Loss of Control ...........................................
Low Fuel Warning Light ...............................
Luggage Carrier ..........................................
247
247
248
242
246
235
233
232
247
240
240
208
208
209
404
131
131
130
128
131
129
131
387
248
184
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services .................... 542
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 545
At Least Once a Month ............................ 545
At Least Once a Year .............................. 546
Introduction .............................................. 536
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 543
Maintenance Record ................................ 552
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 536
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 550
Owner Checks and Services .................... 544
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 548
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 539
Using ....................................................... 537
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 536
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 242
Manual Rear Quarter Windows .................... 144
Manual Seats .................................................. 9
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 256
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 165
Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 166
Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 166
Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 165
585
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................... 309
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 150
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 550
Outside
Convex Mirror .......................................... 166
Heated Mirrors ......................................... 166
Power Mirrors .......................................... 165
Overhead Console ....................................... 181
Overhead Console Switchbank .................... 211
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ....................................... 453
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 544
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
O
P
Mobile Digital Media System ....................... 345
MP3 ............................................................ 301
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 559
N
Odometer .................................................... 232
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 232
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 385
Oil
Engine ..................................................... 439
Pressure Light .......................................... 246
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 442
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 56
Online Owner Center ................................... 559
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 167
Other Warning Devices ................................ 194
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 223
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 214
586
Paint, Damage ............................................
Park Aid ......................................................
Park (P)
Shifting Into .............................................
Shifting Out of .........................................
Parking
Assist .......................................................
Brake .......................................................
Over Things That Burn ............................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...............
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...............
Passenger Sensing System .........................
Passing .......................................................
524
212
160
161
212
159
162
235
228
106
385
PASS-Key® III ............................................. 148
PASS-Key® III Operation ............................. 148
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 214
Door Locks .............................................. 129
Electrical System ..................................... 527
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........... 215
Rear Quarter Windows ............................. 145
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 152
Seat .......................................................... 10
Sliding Door ............................................. 134
Steering Fluid .......................................... 459
Windows .................................................. 144
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 55
Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ......... 131
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 36
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ................................ 451
Radios ........................................................ 284
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 369
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 369
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................ 309
Radio with CD ......................................... 286
Rear Seat Audio ............................. 340, 343
Setting the Time ...................................... 285
Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 367
Understanding Reception ......................... 368
Rear Climate Control System ............. 224, 226
Rear Reading Lamps .................................. 209
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 52
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...................... 340, 343
Rear Seat Entertainment System ........ 309, 324
Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 13
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 48
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 199
587
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 165
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 548
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 410
Remote Keyless Entry System .................... 120
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ...... 121
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 504
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 501
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 475
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 573
General Motors ........................................ 573
United States Government ....................... 573
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ............... 114
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................ 115
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 152
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 48
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 562
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 404
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 551
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 164
588
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 233
Pretensioners ............................................. 55
Reminder Light ........................................ 232
Safety Belts
Care of Safety Belts and Built-in
Child Restraint Harness ........................ 520
Driver Position ........................................... 38
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 37
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................ 36
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 52
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 48
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 48
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 55
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 48
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 32
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 47
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 539
Seats
Bucket Seats, Rear .................................... 13
Captain Chairs ........................................... 22
Head Restraints ......................................... 13
Seats (cont.)
Heated Seats ............................................. 10
Manual ........................................................ 9
Power Seats .............................................. 10
Rear Seat Operation .................................. 13
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 11
Third Row Seat ......................................... 27
Second Row Center Console ...................... 183
Secondary Latch System ............................. 511
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ..................................... 77
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 80
Security Light .............................................. 247
Service ........................................................ 426
Accessories and Modifications .................. 426
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ......................................... 428
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 427
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 427
Engine Soon Light ................................... 242
Publications Ordering Information ............. 574
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 112
Setting the Time .......................................... 285
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 524
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 160
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 161
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 47
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 196
Sliding Door, Power ..................................... 134
Sliding Doors, Dual ..................................... 131
Spare Tire
Accessory Inflator ..................................... 496
Compact .................................................. 516
Installing .................................................. 504
Removing ................................................ 501
Storing ..................................................... 513
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 533
Speedometer ............................................... 232
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 381
Starting Your Engine ................................... 152
Steering ...................................................... 383
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 367
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 195
Storage Areas ............................................. 180
Convenience Center ................................. 186
Convenience Net ............................. 185, 186
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 180
Floor Console Storage Area ..................... 183
Folding Tray ............................................. 183
Glove Box ................................................ 180
Luggage Carrier ....................................... 184
Overhead Console ................................... 181
589
Storage Areas (cont.)
Second Row Center Console ...................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ...............
Sun Visors ..................................................
Switchbanks
Overhead Console ...................................
183
403
145
211
T
Tachometer ................................................. 232
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ..................................... 473
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 240
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 367
Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 145
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 146
PASS-Key® III .......................................... 148
PASS-Key® III Operation .......................... 148
Third Row Seat ............................................. 27
Tilt Wheel .................................................... 195
Tires ........................................................... 477
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 523
Buying New Tires ..................................... 490
Chains ..................................................... 496
590
Tires (cont.)
Changing a Flat Tire ................................
Cleaning ..................................................
Compact Spare Tire .................................
Different Size ...........................................
High-Speed Operation ..............................
If a Tire Goes Flat ...................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................
Inflator, Accessory ....................................
Inspection and Rotation ............................
Installing the Spare Tire ...........................
Removing the Flat Tire .............................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .........
Secondary Latch System .........................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .........
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..............................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
Wheel Replacement .................................
When It Is Time for New Tires .................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
500
523
516
492
486
499
485
496
487
504
504
501
511
513
478
482
493
494
494
489
410
412
410
Traction
Control System (TCS) ..............................
Control System Warning Light ..................
StabiliTrak® System .................................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ...................
Trip Odometer .............................................
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
379
240
381
445
155
232
196
195
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........
Understanding Radio Reception ...................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................
Universal Home Remote System ........ 169,
Operation ........................................ 171,
212
368
493
170
176
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 376
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 404
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders .............................. 567
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 526
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 526
Vehicle Personalization
DIC .......................................................... 275
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 223
Visors .......................................................... 145
591
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 230
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 256
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 194
Other Warning Devices ............................ 194
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 494
Different Size ........................................... 492
Replacement ............................................ 494
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 68
Windows ..................................................... 143
Manual Rear Quarter ............................... 144
Power ...................................................... 144
Power Rear Quarter ................................. 145
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .....
Washer ....................................................
Washer Fluid ...........................................
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................
Wiper Fuses ............................................
Wipers .....................................................
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ...................
Winter Driving .............................................
Wiper Activated Headlamps .........................
522
198
460
476
527
197
199
399
205
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 307
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 370
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 536
592